THE ANATOMY OF THE Body of Man:

Wherein is exactly described every Part thereof, in the same Manner as it is Commonly shewed in Publick Anatomies.

And for the further help of yong Physitians and Chy­rurgions, there is added very many Copper Cuts, far larger than is printed in any Book written in the English Tongue.

Also Explanations of every particular expressed in the Copper Plates.

Published in Latin By Joh. Veslingus, Reader of the Publick Anatomy in the most Famous University of Padua;

And Englished By Nich. Culpeper Gent. Student in Physick and Astrology, living in Spittle-fields neer London.

LONDON: Printed by Peter Cole in Leaden-Hall, and are to be sold at his Shop, at the sign of the Printing-Press in Cornhil neer the Royal Exchange. 1653.

TO HIS WORTHY FRIEND Samuel Hyland Esquire; Nich. Culpeper wisheth encrease of Grace in this World, and a Crown of Glory in that to come.

Worthy Sir,

IT might seem a strange Speech (had it not had a private interpretation) that of Tirestas the Prophet, quoted by the Poet, who answe­red Liriope, enquiring of him, Whether her son Narcissus should be long lived or not? he re­plied, He should if he knew not himself; an an­swer as strange as it was obscure: for that Learned and wise Greek, held, That the knowledg of a mans self was the first step to vertue; and sad experience witnesseth that many in our daies have been ruinated for lack of it, but unhappy Nar­cissus (if the Poets say true) fell inammored on his own beauty, and so perished. If it made any thing at all to my present pur­pose, I could quote you what many other Histories say of him; however the Moral of it (if rightly considered) may give a check to such, who pursuing after shadows, lose the substance: As for the Speech of Tiresias, if it be taken in a general accep­tance, it will be found as false as what is falsest, the knowledg of a mans self being of all Natural knowledg the most profound and most to be desired, for he that knows himself aright cannot but know all the world, because he is an Epitome of it; Know­ledg was that which Solomon desired when God gave him all the world to chuse in, and bad him ask what he would have, and he would give it him, as you may reade 1 Kings, 3. he said, Lord, give thy servant an understanding heart that he may judg between good and bad: And the speech pleased the Lord that Solomon had asked this [Page] thing: And God said unto him, because thou hast asked this thing, and hast not asked for thy self long life, neither hast asked riches for thy self, neither hast asked the life of thy enemies, but hast asked for thy self Knowledg to discern judgment; Behold, I have done according to thy word, Lo, I have given thee a wise and understanding heart, so that there was none like thee before thee, neither after thee shall any arise like unto thee; And also I have given thee that which thou hast not asked, both riches and honor. It seems God rewards those with transitory things which seek knowledg of him in the first place, and if so, how will he reward those that labor what they can with might and main to hide knowledg from their Brethren and fellow Creatures? Indeed those that are used to behold and view the Nature and Reasons of things, may easily perceive, not only by the inward Gifts and Endowments of mans Mind, but also by the outward Shape of his Body, far passing and surpassing all o­ther living Creatures, that he was made for some notable end and purpose above them: This the Poets themselves could and did discover.

Prona (que) cum spectent animalia caetera terram,
Os homini sublime dedit, Coelum (que) videri
Jussit, & erectos, ad sidera tollere vultus.
And whereas others see with down-cast eyes,
He with a lofty look did man indue,
And bad him Heavens transcendent glory view.

It was a most Divine Speech of the Poet indeed, Man was made with an erected face to admire at the glory of the Creator; a man shall seldom hear a truer word in the Pulpit, so that it is palpable that man was not made for Pleasure, nor Honor, nor enough of needful outward things which they commonly call Riches, which the men of this Iron Age look after in the first place, though they be indeed the last and lowest part of the world; they are necessary servants to a man, and as servants they are to be used; and whosoever is respected in this world for his riches sake, he is respected for his servants sake, and not for his own: and indeed neither the Phylosophers of Old, nor yet the Men of our Daies could ever make a true definition what [Page] Riches was, or at leastwise such an one as could please me: Ari­stotle held Riches to be enough of things needful, but if that be true, then a Beast is as rich as a Saint. The Stoick Phylosophers held riches to consist in having enough Earth and Air, but if that be true, how should a man do for Victuals? this present world holds riches to be enough of Gold and Silver, but what one of their enoughs is I know not, nor (I am confident) them­selves neither.

Crescit amor mummi, quantum ipsa pecunia crescit.
—the event doth prove
As Riches doth encrease, so doth its love.

The more Riches men have, the more they desire, and they never know when they have enough; for if a covetous man had as many Needles as Pauls would hold, and as many Bags of Gold as all those needles would last stitching, they would never be contented: besides, if riches consist barely in the enjoyment of money, then that man which Pliny (when Hannibal besieged Casiline, and there was a sore famine in the Town) quotes, would be accounted a very rich man who sold a mouse for two hundred pence one day, and died himself for lack of food the next.

But worthy Sir, It is not Riches I treat of in this Book, but Knowledg, and particularly the knowledg of a mans Body: I will not stand here to prove how much the exact knowledg of the Body conduceth to the mending or marring of the internal Faculties or Endowments of the mind, for that were but to trouble you in the midst of your business amongst your many Imployments, both private at home, and publick abroad for the good of this Nation, the last of which hath made your Name precious in the eyes of all honest people: neither shall I spend time in making an Apology why I appear in print in this Nature wherein I have so many Predecessors in the English Tongue; the reason is clear, Some of them are too large, others too short, none of them have the Demensions of Mans Body so exactly cut in Copper as you shall find them in this Book, wherein, as in a looking Glass, you may see man turned the wrong side out­wards, and all his internal parts laid open to you view, where­by [Page] your spirit may be even ravished in the consideration of the Wisdom and Power of that God who hath made man in such an absolute form, so accurate in all his delineaments; if such be the Creature, what is the Creator?

Lastly, Let me crave pardon, and I hope I shall not be de­nied it, in presuming to stamp your Name in the beginning of it: Truly your reallity to the good of this Nation was such, and so still continues even in that crooked and perverse Generation in which we live, that I knew no other way how to shew forth a thankful mind to you than by doing as I have done: If it be accounted a fault, let it be venial, and let an honest intent find sooner entertainment with you than a hare-brain'd action.

The God of heaven and earth bless you with the Blessings both of this Life, and that to come, that you may go on in the good work as hitherto you have done, even till such time as it pleaseth him to let us enjoy one desired Liberty. Sir I am

Yours unfainedly NICH. CULPEPER.

TO THE READER.

Courteous Reader,

IT is no hard matter for one that hath been trained up in the School of Xermes, and is any thing skilled at all in the Egyptian Learning ( Xermetical Phy­losophy being far more ancient than Galens Me­thod) I say it is no hard matter for one that hath been trained up in that Learning to prove that the life of all things is all one with it self in all persons, and that the difference between sick persons and healthful, wise persons and fools, vertuous persons and vicious, if you will take vertue and vice in a Phylosophical sence, lies in the temper of their Bodies; neither is it any smal step to the knowledg of the temper of a mans Body, to know the exact deliniaments thereof in an Anatomical way; a man must know in what part of the Body a Disease lies, and the place, and quality of that place also, before he knows how to remedy it, if Galen's Art be true; and I would willingly teach Galenists, if I thought they were not too proud to learn; I would fain teach fools wisdom if they were but willing to learn; for why may there not be a way left in Nature to bring ignorant people to knowledg, as there is to bring mad people to a sober life? which the vulgar commonly call, Rational. That Madness is a Disease of the Body, all know, neither is it unknown but to few that Folly is a Disease of the Mind, and yet it is Epidemical at this time, the more is the pity; it were easily proved if a man would go about it, That it is the Body afflicts the Mind; for it is absolutely impossible the Mind should afflict the Body, the Mind being Aetherial, Immortal, and no way subject to corruption: I care not greatly if I spend a little time and pains in clearing this to you, so far as will serve the turn to shew the truth of it, and not to exceed the limits of an Epistle.

The Divine and Immortal Mind proper to man is wise, and alike wise in all men, being one and the same in all points in all men; and this is ea­sily proved because God from whence it comes is one and the same; the dif­ference then, is when it is divided and sent into different places. It was ex­cellently spoken of that Noble Polonian, saith he, If you lay diverse Colors round upon a Table at a distance one from another, imagine White lay here, and Green there, and Red there, Blue there, Salt in another place, Allum in another; now if you take a pot of fair clear Water, and powr down in the midst of them, that which runs through the red Color will be red, and that which runs through the blue Color will be blue, and that which runs through the Salt will be salt, and that which runs through the Allum will be Allumy, &c. and yet the water which is powred down a­mongst them is one and the same.

Take another familiar Example or two, for things are better cleared by Examples than they are by themselves: There are innumerable kinds of Lights in the world, that differ in form and bigness, according to the mat­ter that receives them; there are some great fires, and some little ones, some burn cleer, and some are smoky; there are some great Candles, and some smal ones, and some Torches, and yet the Sun from whence all these receive their light, is of it self all one and the same in all places. Take another Example, which shall bring the matter a little closer home to the point, As the Sun of himself ever shineth and seeth all things, unless his beams be stopped by a cloud or some other thick matter; even so the Mind of Man considered alone by it self, knoweth all things, but being entangled in the Body, and darkned by its cloudiness and infirmities, it can see nothing without the leave and help of the Body; this course then the Mind is fain to take, considering her self she cannot step forth out of the Body, nor range abroad to discern the Idea's of things as they are in themselves, She is fain to take the demonstrations of things as she can receive them from the Body though they be in never so poor and deceitful a way.

1. She is forced to imploy the outward Spirits that keep their residence in the edg and border of the Body, I mean the five Sences, Seeing, Hea­ring, Smelling, Tasting, and Feeling; neither can these operate with­out their proper Instruments, viz. The parts of the body where they lodg, viz. Seeing cannot see without the Eye, nor Hearing hear without the Ear.

2. These bring in tidings to the Mind, viz. The Shews, Shapes, and Idea's of things; yet cannot the Mind of man understand these without an Interpreter, therefore are there inward Beams or Sences which lodg in the [Page] Brain, three of them by Number, which take these tidings from the ex­ternal sences, and represent them as it were in a glass to the Mind, to wit, Apprehension, Memory, and Judgment; then the mind laying them altogether, and comparing one with another, judges of them, which is good, and which is bad, which is fit, and which is not fit to be done: Now if these Messengers of the Mind, or the places of the Body where they lodg, be foul, or gross, or thick, they give either dull, or false information to the Mind; a Looking-glass if it be so corrupted will do the like to the face of the Body: Thus I think it sufficiently proved that the afflictions of the Mind have their Original from the Body: And besides I have taught you a little Phylosophy, though it belonged nothing at all to my present purpose. I hope you see by this time how beneficial the knowledg of the Anatomy of a Mans Body is to the rectification of the Endowments of his Mind; indeed, to his well-being both in this world, and that to come, if he mind vertue here, and intend to inherit happiness hereafter.

How requisite it is to the Cure of the Diseases of the Body, every one can tell you, and therefore I may hold my peace and not spend time in proving the Crow to be black, or the Swan white. Only this I desire you to take notice of, and so I conclude, That whereas I have been vitupe­rated many times for being Critical in my Writings, I have altogether for born it here, though I confess I shall not please every body in this Trans­lation, whether a man go at one side of the street or the other the dogs will bark at him; and the man in Aesops Fables, whether himself rid, or his boy, or both of them, or neither of them, could not please the next he met.

As for Veslingus the Author of this Work which I have here Transla­ted, he was (and for ought I know, or can hear, is still) the publick Reader of the Anatomy Lecture at the famous Ʋniversity of Padua in Italy. I confess I differ in Opinion from him in some few particulars, and but in few, especially where he makes the Heart the fountain of Blood, as also the Veins that carry it, wherein it is apparent that he drank too deep of Aristotles spittle: I confess I passed it by in silence; diverse are of that Opinion; let them give me leave to use mine, as I have given them to use theirs. As for the Brass Cuts, they are performed very exactly, far excee­ding any that ever were printed in the English Tongue, inferior to none in the world. Truly, I wish this poor Nation much good by this Work, that the Lord would open their eyes, that they might see the truth and them­selves, and let them rest confident, That whilst I am amongst the Living, I shall never cease to do them good according to my power.

Nich. Culpeper.

The Contents of the CHAPTERS.

  • CHAP. 1. Of the common Coverings of the Body. Page 1
  • CHAP. 2. Of the Bones and Muscles of the Abdomen, and of the Peritonaeum. Page 5
  • CHAP. 3. Of the Omentum, Stomach, and Guts Page 9
  • CHAP. 4. Of the Mesenterium, Sweet-bread, Liver, and Spleen Page 15
  • CHAP. 5. Of the Kidneys, Ureters, and Bladder Page 11
  • CHAP. 6. Of the Instruments of Generation in Man Page 23
  • CHAP. 7. Of the Instruments of Generation in Women Page 26
  • CHAP. 8. Of the Fruit in the Womb Page 30
  • CHAP. 9. Of the external parts of the Breast. Page 35
  • CHAP. 10. Of the Heart and Lungues Page 39
  • CHAP. 11. Of the organs of Voyce and Speech Page 44
  • CHAP. 12. Of the Muscles of the Scapula, Back, and certain of the Head Page 48
  • Chap. 13. Of the external parts of the Head, their Bones and Muscles Page 51
  • Chap. 14. Of the Brain and Cerebellum Page 58
  • Chap. 15. Of the Eyes Page 64
  • Chap. 16. Of the Ears Page 69
  • Chap. 17. Of the Bones of the Extream Parts Page 75
  • Chap. 18. Of the Muscles of the Hands Page 180
  • Chap. 19. Of the Muscles of the Foot Page 184
  • Chap. 20. Of the Veins, Arteries, and Nerves of the Extream Parts Page 188

Joh. Veslingus to the Reader.

DEmetrius sacked Rhodes, and the Suburbs being taken, he threatned the City with Fire and Sword; they sen­ding an Embassador, entreated him, that he would not burn the Table of Protogenis, placed upon the Wall; he readily answers, That he would sooner burn the Image of his Father, than such a piece of Workmanship; for the Workman had painted Jalysus one of the Heroes of Rhodes in a Table, to wit, the Image of the Body drawn with a Pensil.

What place then (my Reader) should the Context it self of the Body of Man, his inward Parts and Adornments, have in our minds, when Demetrius was so chary of only the Shadow? Truly, the very same which the VVorkmanship of God ought to have, he being a delicate Epi­tome of the whol world, by which alone the Eternal God shewed what he was able to do in the Ʋniverse.

Men famous for VVisdom in Ancient times were ravished with con­templation of this; although from the Age of Alcmaeon even to Dio­cles, they were content with the curious Inspections only, and buried the Mystery in silence, and left nothing to posterity, till the exquisite Knowledg of Mans Body inflamed Man with a greater desire of Study, brought it out of darkness into light, as the most solid Foundation of that part of Physick called Physyology: Amongst the Ancients, Galen bears away the Bell in this part of Study, which is to be found in his Praise-worthy Works of Dissection; afterwards in this latter Age, the Precepts of this Art being rectified, diligent men encreased the Art of Anatomy of the Body of Man, with profitable Observations; then it came into great Volumns, explaining the Functions confusedly, and answering needless Questions; also Figures were added cut in Copper, to feed the Eyes of those that had not opportunity to see the Dissection.

In this so famous Anatomical Light, I have known not a few, profit but little by so great Labors, being wearied out with the bulk of the Books, and miserably intangled in the snares of Controversies; another spends all his time in contemplating the Figures, as though he were beholding the Siege of Troy, and being ignorant of the Substance, rejoyceth in the Image of things.

To recal those Errors, I framed this smal VVork, in the manner as we shew it in publick Dissections of the Body of Man: I avoided Controver­sies, which belong rather to Contemplatists, than the Theaters of Anato­mists, which were built to behold, not to dispute in. I was least of all so­licitous about the Figures; for although very many ingenuous men have been very exact in them, yet he labors in vain, that labors to find the na­tural position of Parts, their magnitude, order, hardness, softness, and as Celsus saith, their smoothness, process, recess, insertion into another, or reception of another into themselves, accurately by them.

What ever it be, we would have it brief, and not enlarge it with many words, imitating that of Salustius of the Carthaginian Law; it is better to speak few things here, then to pass by many things with silence, seeing such things as are prescribed to yong men of the Body of Man, are scarce better done any where, than what here is laid down to faithful Eyes; and yet if you regard only the speech, you will deny, as Apelles did of the Table of Protogenis, that the work hath any grace; or if you regard the novilty of the stile; both of them I easily grant you, being not desirous of Popular applause.

I propound the History of the Parts of the Body shewed in Dissections; for what profits it to garnish it with flourishes, which appears without spot in its Native Beauty, being the naked Workmanship of Nature: Neither thought I good to abstain from the words already in use, lest I should seem to draw a cloud over other Mens Works, and darken the way to the Temples of Wisdom and Aesculapius. Most of it I drew out of the common Fountain, but the Manuduction is drawn out of my own Vessel. I had to my Master, a famous man, Fabricius Bartoletus of Bonona, Chief Physitian to the Duke of Mantua.

If you regard the Order, you are beholding to me for that; I digested it into so many Chapters, as publickly it is demonstrated in Anatomies, and the Series of every Chapter is in the same manner as it is shewed to the eye in publick Dissections; In the Breast I shew the Adductor of the Shoulder, and the Muscles of the Scapula called Serrati, before the [Page] Intercostals, the Lumbal Muscles after the Extenders of the back, the movers of the Scapula before the muscles of the head and back: The reason that I joyn the Tongue with the Larynx, is it's singular nexure with the Os Hyois, and the Os Hyois with the Larinx; the bones of the Limbs are set before the Muscles, seeing the greatest part of them move the bones: to both I add the Nerves, Arteries, and veins, which the Divine Creator hath made common with the bones and muscles. I did not treat of the Nature of similary parts by themselves for brevity sake, seeing that belongs rather to Physiology, and without Tautology could not here be treated of.

This I intreat of thee who ever reads this Work, That thou wouldest give thy mind as well to pardon failings, as to know the truth, if thou meetest with any, caused either through forgetfulness, or non-understn­ding: my serious intent was to lead such young men as are studious in Physick into the Knowledg of Anatomy; if my endeavors want strength, thou canst not in equity deny me pardon, seeing thou thy self maist run upon the same Rocks in other difficulties. Farewel

The Names of several Books printed by Peter Cole, at the sign of the Printing-Press in Cornhil, by the Exchange; London.

Five several Books, by Nich. Culpeper, Gent. Student in Physick and Astrology.

1 A Translation of the New Dispensatory, made by the Colledg of Physitians of London. Whereunto is added, The Key to Galen's Method of Physick.

2 A DIRECTORY for Midwives; or a Guide for Women.

3 GALEN'S Art of PHYSICK with a large Comment.

4 The ENGLISH PHYSITIAN; being an Astrologo-Physical Discourse of the Vulgar Herbs of this Nation; wherein is shewed how to cure a mans self of most Diseases incident to mans Body, with such things as grow in England, and for three-pence charge.

Also in the same Book is shewed, 1. The time of ga­thering all Herbs both Vulgarly and Astrologically. 2. The way of drying and keeping them and their Juyces. 3. The way of making and keeping all manner of useful Compounds, made of those Herbs. 4. The way of mixing the Medicines according to Cause, and mixture of the Disease, and the part of the Body afflicted.

5 The Anatomy of the Body of Man, Wherein is ex­actly described the several parts of the Body of Man, illustrated with very many large Brass Plates.

A Godly and Fruitful Exposition, on the first Epistle of Peter. By Mr. John Rogers, Minister of the Word of God at Dedham in Essex.

The Wonders of the Load-stone, by Mr. Samuel Ward of Ipswich.

An Exposition on the Gospel of the Evangelist St. Mat­thew, by Mr. Ward.

Clows Chirurgery.

Marks of Salvation.

Christians Engagement for the Gospel, by John Good-win.

Great Church Ordinance of Baptism.

Mr. Love's Case, containing his Petitions, Narrative, and Speech.

Vox Pacifica, or a Perswasive to Peace.

Dr. Prestons Saints submission, and Satans Overthrow.

Pious mans practice in Parliament Time.

A Treatise of the Rickets, being a Disease common to Children; Wherein is shewed, 1. The Essence. 2. The Causes. 3. The Signs. 4. The Remedies of the Disease. Published in Latin by Dr. Glisson, Dr. Bale, and Dr. Regemorter, now translated into Eng­lish.

Mr. Symsons Sermon at Westminster.

Mr. Feaks Sermon before the Lord Major.

Mr. Phillips Treatise of Hell.

—of Christs Geneology.

Seven Books of Mr. Jeremiah Burroughs lately published; As also the Texts of Scripture upon which they are grounded.

1 The Rare Jewel of Christian Contentment, on Phil. 4.11. Wherin is shewed, 1. What Contentmentis, 2. It is an holy Art and Mystery, 3. The Excellencies of it, 4. The Evil of the contrary sin of Murmuring, and the Aggravations of it.

2 Gospel-Worship, on Levit. 10.3. Wherin is shewed, 1. The right manner of the Worship of God in ge­neral; and particularly, In Hearing the Word, Recei­ving the Lords Supper, and Prayer.

3 Gospel-Conversation, on Phil. 1.17. Wherin is shew­ed, 1. That the Conversations of Beleevers must be above what could be by the Light of Nature, 2. Be­yond those that lived under the Law, 3. And sutable to what Truths the Gospel. holds forth. To which is added, The Misery of those Men that have their Por­tion in this Life only, on Psal. 17.14.

4 A Treatise of Earthly-mindedness. Wherein is shew­ed, 1 What Earthly-mindedness is, 2 The great Evil therof, on Phil. 3. part of the 19. Vers. Also to the same Book is joyned, A Treatise of Heavenly-mindedness, and walking with God, on Gen. 5.24. and on Phil. 3.20.

5 An Exposition, on the fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh Chapters of the Prophesie of Hosea.

6 An Exposition on the eighth, ninth, and tenth Chap­ters of Hosea.

7 An Exposition on the eleventh, twelfth, and thirteenth Chapters of Hosea, being now Compleat.

Twelve several Books of Mr. William Bridg, Collected into one Volumn. Viz.

1 The great Gospel-Mystery of the Saints Comfort and Holiness, opened and applied from Christs Priestly Office.

2 Satans Power to Tempt; and Christs Love to, and Care of His People under Temptation.

3 Thankfulness required in every Condition.

4 Grace for Grace; or, the Overflowings of Christs Fulness received by all Saints.

5 The Spiritual Actings of Faith, through Natural Impossibilities.

6 Evangelical Repentance.

7 The Spiritual-Life, and In-Being of Christ in all Beleevers.

8 The Woman of Canaan.

9 The Saints Hiding-Place in time of Gods Anger.

10 Christs Coming is at our Midnight.

11 A Vindication of Gospel Ordinances.

12 Grace and Love beyond Gifts.

A Congregational Church is a Catholike Visible Church By Samuel Stone, in New England.

A Treatise of Politick Power, wherein 7 Questions are Answered, 1. Whereof Power is made, and for what ordained; 2. Whether Kings and Governors have an absolute Power over the People; 3. Whether Kings and Governors be subject to the Laws of God, or the Laws of their Countries; 4. How far the People are to obey their Governors; 5. Whether all the People have be their Governors; 6. Whether it be Lawful to depose an evil Governor; 7. What Confidence is to be given to Princes.

The Compassionate Samaritan.

Dr. Sibbs on the Philippians.

The Best and Worst Magistrate, by Obadiah Sedgwick.

The craft and cruelty of the churches Adversaries, by Matthew Newcomin.

A sacred Panygrick, by Steph. Martial.

Barriffs Military Discipline.

The Immortality of Mans Soul.

The Anatomist Anatomized.

King Charls his Case, or an Appeal to all rational men concerning his Tryal.

Mr. Owens stedfastness of the Promises.

Mr. Owen against Mr. Baxter.

AN ANATOMICAL TREATISE.

CHAP. 1. Of the common Coverings of the Body.

IF you disdain not to turn thy eyes and mind to the Corps of Man Artificially dissected, whether the Profession of Wisdom or Physick delight thee, I promise thee here something worth thy labor and not to be despised, for there is not the least nor most abject part of Man, but by its admirable structure thou maiest know him that made thee, to be most wise, most powerful: Thou shalt find out the causes of all the actions, the consent and concord of thy whol Body, the Founda­tion of Health and Sickness, thou maiest the better apply Remedies to afflicted parts; and in the time when Nature calls for remedy, thou nee­dest not be hurried on with rashness, nor retarded by fear.

In the Body of Man, both Ventricles and Limbs are to be heeded; the common name of Limbs comprehends both Hands and Feet: we cal those notable Cavities of the Body, Ventricles, in which Nature hath placed di­verse parts dedicated to diverse actions, to settle their abode in. Of these are three.

The first, which is the lower, is called the Abdomen and is internally compassed with the Psritonaeum, it is called the Abdomen, because it hides and involves all those Bowels which are ordained for the preparation of the nourishment of the whol Body, the begetting of Children, the pro­ducing and cherishing of the Seed.

The second, which is the middle, is bounded about with the Pleura, It is in the Fountain of vital heat and in it are the Lungues.

The third, which is the highest, is included in the head, and stoutly defended by the Skull; in this, Plato placeth the Coelestial part of Man.

We, because we would avoid putrifaction, begin the Dissection at the lower Ventricle, or Abdomen, whose fore part, which is next the lower Cartilages of the Ribs, the ancients called Hypochondria, and is divided into the right and left; But the other, we of Modern times, very fitly call that part which is next the Stomach and the uppermost Guts, Epi­gastrium; but that which contains the lower part of the belly, even to the groyn and privities, Hypocastrium, the middle, between the Epiga­strium and Hypogastrium; we call the region of the Navil the back part of the Abdomen, the upper part of it is called the Loyns, the lower part the Buttocks.

Of the parts of the Abdomen, some are common to the whol Body, some proper to its self; the common parts are the skin, scarf-skin, fat, and fleshy Membrane.

The Skin is a Membranous covering of the Body, drawn over the out­ward parts, defending them from injury, and giving judgment of tangi­ble Objects: I call it a Membranous covering, because the substance is the same with a Membrane, and it is stretched abroad like it, yet it dif­fers from a Membrane in Temperament, conformation and office; it takes its original not from Blood, nor yet from the Vessels, but from the Seed, and this, the first radiments of the Embrion in the womb testifies, which Nature compasseth about with a thin skin, even so soon as it is compacted; Hence also like other Seminal parts, even in a Blackmoors, under the black thin skin, it is white; neither when it is lost doth Nature restore again the same, but another substance like it, which is called a Callus or Scar.

It receives its quickness of sence from the Nerves, not only the extre­mity of which, but also diverse small branches, are spread abroad in it, as is very cleer in the third and four pair of Nerves which pass to the face and the sixt pair which pass to the Arms. It receives also many small veins and Arteries that so it may be furnished with blood for nou­rishment and vital spirit for quickning, that the coldness and dryness of it may be allayed, that part of of it about the Abdomen, is supplied by veins and Arteries from the Epigastricts, Lumbals, and Mammary branches.

The Habit of the skin is altogether different, according to the variety of temperament, age, sex, and region; The skin on the top of the head is thickest, that on the sides thin, that on the face and palm of the hand thinner, and that of the lips thinnest of all; that on the tops of the fin­gers is mean, that so the sence of touching might be the more perfect. It hath very many passages or holes in it, of which some are wide, as the mouth, nose, ears, eyes, and privities, &c. seing they are necessary either to receive in food, or cast out excrements, others are small and innu­merable by which sweat and fuliginous vapors transpire.

It is in colour naturally white, and sticks loosly to the fat that is under it, so that in some places being cut, it may be blown up from it, as hath been tryed by some in that barbarous fashion of cuting Leprosies; It sticks fast to the fleshy membrane of the fore-head, as also to that of the soles of the feet, and the palms of the hands: So that the motion of those parts, it is drawn into wrinkles together with it, by which as by [Page 3] Hieroglyphicks: the curiosity of mans brain hath drawn indications of things to come.

A famous thin skin covers this skin externally, which the Greeks ve­ry acutely call Epidermis, the Latins Enticula, and we Scarf-skin; it takes its original from the dewy moisture on the out side of the skin, which is made thick into that form, partly by the gentle and nourishing heat of nature, partly by the driness round about, whence it comes to passe that the Embrion being yet very tender, yet this though very soft is found about it; it obtains its firmnesse by age, even such a firmnesse that sometimes it restrains the excrements that pass through the pores of the skin: It is extended all about the body where the skin is, and sometimes through hot and fiery vapors that pass through the pores, you may see it divided; as in such cases when we English say the skin pills off: It is all together void of life and sence, and yet so firmly knit to the skin that it can hardly be seperated.

Neither is the use of this Scarf-skin (though it seems so smal a busines) smal, for without this could not the pores of the skin be covered, the continual moisture of the body restrained, the body be made able to en­dure heat and cold, nor the limbs be clensed of durt and filth.

Serpents seem yearly to cast off this Scarf-skin; but the scaly skin is not a true Scarf-skin, but a thin membrane made of viscous slime and filth, and the driness of the air about, the same happens to men in fea­vers, especially upon their tongue.

Underneath the skin is the fat, which is an unctuous or greasy sub­stance of the body, produced out of the Oyly substance of the nourish­ment, which lying like a mat about the body, not only defends it from the injury of cold, but also restrains the immoderate dissipating, or scat­tering of the internal heat; therefore in the Child even when it detained in the womb, it begins to grow, yet is it more in quantity, and thicker after it is born. Art imitates Nature in this, in that it puts Oyl upon Li­quors which are full of Spirit, least the Spirit should exhale.

The body is universally surrounded with it; if you except the Eye-lids, the lips, and the Privities of men: the office of which would be vi­tiated either by needless weight, or superfluous moisture: The fat is thickest about the Abdomen and loyns, mean upon the breast, and thin­nest upon the head, nature providently regarding and providing for the want of all places: the fat considered in it self ( Quatenus fat) wants both life and sence, yet it receives both, from the Mammary, Lumbal, and Epi­gastrick branches of the arteries, and the strings of the nerves which are mixed with it.

The matter it self from which it is produced shew its temperament to be moderately hot, mixed with an aerial moisture: Its effects are evi­dent, viz. moderately to heat and attenuate, and more plentifully to moisten. Also it is well known to profit much in pains of the sides and joynts, to keep the hair from falling off, and to take away the deformity of scars. It grows most about the hottest parts of the body, and cannot positively take its original from cold: that kind of fat which is called Pinguedo is softer than that which is called Adeps (I suppose Adeps to be [Page 4] that which we English vulgarly call Suet) and as it grows with more dif­ficulty, so it melts without ease. It is joyned to the skin and to the membranes underneath it; and besides the foregoing uses, it moistens and refresheth those parts of the body appoynted for violent motions; lastly it is placed in the intervalls of the Muscles, to better their motion, and encrease their comliness.

Underneath the fat of the whole body is stretched out the skin, which the Latins call Membra Carnosa, and Panniculus Carnosus. I know not what better version to give it then a [fleshy membrane] Although in the Abdo­men of a man ripe in years, it carries no fleshy appearance at all, yet a­bout the fore-head, the Neck, the hinder part of the head, and the Ears, it hath an intertexture of Musculous flesh, and therefore it serves not only to keep the Fat in its due place, but also to divide one Muscle from another, and all of them from the other flesh: It obtains veins, Arteries, and Nerves from the neerest branches to it; it is stretched out over all the parts of the body, even where the use of the Fat is either very little or none at all

Its constitution is not alwaies single; for in fat bodies you shall find it often double, sometimes manifold in respect of temperature: it is cold and dry, which coldness and dryness is quallified by the neerness of the flesh and Fat, it is exquisite in sence, anoyed by sharp vapors, and sud­dain shakings, it sticks close to the Fat, to the Muscles, to the ligaments of the bones, at which places it may easily be found.

Place here the Table of the first Chapter, which hath the Number 1. at the corner of the brass Plate.

[Page]
AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF THE FIRST CHAPTER.
The first Figure shews the Effigies of a living Man, in which, not only the external parts of the Abdomen, but also the Veins under the Skin which are conspicuous are represented.
  • A The right Hypochondria.
  • B The left Hypochondria.
  • CC The Epigastrium.
  • DD The Bowels.
  • EE The Hypogastrium.
  • FF The Groyns.
  • G The Region above the Privities.
  • H The Vein of the Forehead.
  • I The Vein of the Temples.
  • K The external Jugular Vein.
  • L The cephalick vein of the right Arm.
  • M The basilick vein of the right Arm.
  • N The middle or common Vein, which is not in the same place in all Bodies.
  • O The cephalick vein of the left Hand.
  • P The vein of the left Hand, called Salvatella.
  • QQ The Vein Saphaena descending.
  • RR The Vein Saphaena in the Foot it it self.
  • SS The Sciatick Vein.

The Second Figure expresseth the common coverings of the Body of Man, and the Muscles under them laid open.
  • A A The Scarf-skin.
  • B B B B The Skin.
  • C C C C The Fat.
  • D D D D The fleshy Membrane.
  • E E Part of the pectoral Muscles laid open.
  • F F F Certain beginnings of the Muscles called Serrati antici majores.
  • GG HH II The Muscles of the Abdomen obliquely descending.
  • G HH Their toothed beginnings.
  • I I I I The tendon of the oblique des­cending Muscles, under which the right Muscles of the Abdomen with their Ner­vous inscriptions appear.
  • K K The white line of the Abdomen.
[Page]

CHAP. 2. Of the Bones and Muscles of the Abdomen, and of the Peritonaeum.

THe parts which are properly attributed to the Abdomen, are either external (which deservedly bear the name of parts containing) or internal which we call parts contained; amongst the external are numbred the Bones, the Muscles, and the Peritonaeum connexed with them.

We begin with the Bones which are the drier parts of the body of man, and the harder, ordained for the stability of the whole body, the firmness of the joynts, and the strength of voluntary motion.

Their first substance, they have from the seed, and therefore they are all Carthilaginous at first, and grow solid in process of time, they are long­est before they grow bony at the ends, which the Greeks call Epiphyses, and the Latins Appendices.

They are covered with a notable membrane which is called Perioste­um, of the vessels they receive in, the Veins are evident, the Arteries more obscure, and the Nerves obscurest of all; and yet the pain which is felt not in a few places, when they are laid open by the hand of the Chyrurgion, manifesteth, that the Nerves penitrate not only to the ex­ternal membrane, but also into the holes of the Bones themselves.

There is a mighty diversity both in their magnitude and figure, so that they ought all to be handled in particular, and not in the universal: They are in number above three hundred, a great part of them are bo­wed into Sinus, or stick out in heads, which nature hath covered with a soft cartilage as it were with a crust; that so the bowing of the joynts might be the safer and readier: part of them have cavities like long pipes, part of them have small holes like Sponges, as the present bones of the Abdomen have; all of them abound with marrow, or with a juyce like marrow, whereby their cold and dry nature is not a little mitiga­ted.

The joyning of the Bones is made the stronger both by Carthilages and Ligaments, of which the Cartilages are Spermatical parts usually joyned to the Bones, but not so hard, that so the joynts may bend the better: The Ligaments are Spermatical also, and are softer than the Cartilages, although they are more or less soft according as they are round or flat: It is very fitting we should take notice of the manner of their conjunction or joyning severally.

The Bones of the Abdomen are but few in number, but of great bulk, occupying the lower and hinder part of it, in the fore part they are not necessary, least they should hinder the distention of the belly: These be the Vertebrae of the loyns, the os Sacrum, Coccix, that which the Ancients [Page 6] called the Bone without a name, vulgarly called Ischium or Coxa, which containeth the Ilium, Coccendix and the Bones of the Pubis.

The Vertebrae of the loyns are in number five, ordained for the safe passage of the Marrow of the back, and the descending of the Nerves, the inferior are larger than the superior, that they may the better hold up the back, they have various processes which Authors call Apophyses, of which two are transverse, four oblique, two superior, and as many in­ferior, and one acute: the oblique processes especially strengthen the joynts; the transverse and acute, are for the convenience of the Muscles: In the middle cavitiy of the Vertebrae the Marrow of the back descends; other lesser cavities are found about the sides, where the Vertebrae are joyned, to give passage to the Nerves of the loyns; they are joyned backwards by their oblique processes, by that juncture which the Greeks call, Ginglymos, when there is a mutual reception between them, for­wards by Hormonia; the rest are joyned by Syndesmos, or by the benefit of Ligaments, although they stick but loosly together, least immode­rate rigor should make the bowing of the loyns difficult; but this being common to the rest of the Vertebrae: I shall passe it by in few words.

Under the loyns is the os Sacrum, being notable above all the rest for its thickness and strength, being the Basis of so many Vertebraes which are above it; for the most part it consists of six parts, which aemulate the Vertebrae, growing narrower by degrees from abroad beginning; all of them being immovable, and in aged Persons seeming to be but one Bone.

Like an appendix to the os Sacrum is the os Coccix composed of three small bones bowed forward for the more convenient sitting of the man, their joyning together by Cartilages is but loose, so that they are some­what moved out of their places by the hard travail of women.

On both sides of this follows the os Ilium, which is the superior part of the Coxa, or Bone without a name. It is large, strong, and with a broad back. The gut called Ilium gave the name to this Bone, either because its manifold circulations are neer it, or else because it seems to be prop­ped up by this Bone.

To this is committed the os Coxendix, which others call Ischium; ano­ther part of the Coxa, being also thick and firm, it hath a large Cavity like the saucers of the Ancients, into which the globous head of the thigh is placed and it is joyned to the sides of the os Sacrum, firmly with a doubletye.

Forwards from this on both sides is stretched out the os Pubis, com­pared to the former; it is thin, and hath a great hole through it, least its weight should hinder the nimbleness of the body: on its extream parts it hath a Cartilage, and it is strongly knit to the next bone of the side, both with a circular and membranous Ligament; neither yet is this knitting so tith but it may (like the former bones we mentioned) give way a little in the strong travail of women.

But this Description of Bones (according to the consent of most Au­thors) must be otherwise propounded, if we regard their Natural di­stinction as they are in the Bodies of Children; for in such, even ti [...] [Page 7] seven years of age, they are manifestly divided, and may be taken asun­der; therefore that portion which is the lower, broader, and larger, e­ven to the middle of the Acetabulum, makes the Os Ilium, the other porti­on stretched forward from the Acetabulum, divided two waies; the supe­rior part makes the Os Pubis the inferior, the Os Coxendix, which not a­lone, but with the other two joyn'd with it, make the Sinus for the head of the Thigh, and with the Os-pubis makes that foremost large hole.

Urgent necessity requires Muscles in the Abdomen for the expelling of excrements, to wit, Organical parts, endewed with fibrous flesh, and strong tendons, by which Nature endeavor the compression of the belly and the parts therein contained. Of the Muscles there are five pair, which by reason of the diversity of their Operations, have obtained a diversity of names.

The first are, Obliquely descending, and are larger than the rest, and have a very broad Tendon, which goes like two other subjects, viz. the Peri­tonaeum in men, and the worm-like Ligament of the womb in women, neer to the Groyn: They take their beginning under the great Musculus Serratus of the Breast, by unequal or toothlike productions, then they fall back, where the transverse processes of the Vertebrae of the Loyns end; in the middle of the Abdomen a concourse of tendons being made, they end there, in a certain white line, they are furnished with Veins, Arteries and Nerves from the branches of the intercostals where they come to the breast.

The next pair of the Muscles of the Abdomen is termed Obliquely As­cending, arising neer the transverse processes of the Vertebrae of the Loyns, and the utmost brim of the Os-Ilium; rising thence they joyn themselves to the eleventh and twelfth ribs, and after by a doubled tendon they come to the right Muscles of the Abdomen, they also end in the white line, they have their Veins and Arteries from the branches of the Veins and Arteries which are called Musculae, whose original is from the Vena cava and the great Artery, about their division into the Iliack branches, they have their Nerves from the Lumballs, and the lowermost in­tercostals.

The third pair are Transverse Muscles and have a Membranous beginning from the Transverse Processes of the Vertebrae of the Loyns, and passing by the Os Ilium, they stick to the Peritonaeum and end where the other did; they participate of the same Veins, Arteries, and Nerves with the Mus­cles obliquely ascending,

The right Muscles make the fourth pair, in which, by excellent work­manship of the Creator, the Epigastrick Veins and Arteries ascend, then these carriers of nourishment and vital heat descend by the internal mammaries neer the Cartilage called Mucronata, or through its cleft: The Anastomosis of these Veins is very conspicuous in women with child, and therefore the womb being much stopped, or compressed with great swellings, being stretched from the Groyn up to the Breasts, they resemble a channel, sometimes of the thickness of a finger; They have their Nerves from the intercostals, stretched all along the middle of the Abdomen, they are divided into two, three, and sometimes into [Page 8] four inscriptions, as it were into so many Muscles, at the Cartilages of the Ribs, and the Cartilage of the breast, called Mucronata where they rise, they are fleshy, and they end in the Os Pubis where they are faste­ned by a strong and tendinous body.

The Muscles called Pyramidales make up the fifth pair, the figure of which, especially joyned together, being like a Pyramide, gave them their name; they take their basis from the Os Pubis, from which rising and growing more slender by degrees, they admit their tendon into the white Line; they are auxiliary to the right Muscles, and compress the lower parts the more strongly, the ends of the right Muscles Being fle­shy and broad supply the defect of these.

But the four greater pairs which we mentioned, bind in the Abdomen, for the expulsion of excrements, and also help the breast to avoid its flegm. An use also may be given of each of them severally, and no obscure one neither, seing they cherish the heat of the Bowels, and ad comliness to the part, we might mention the two Lumbal Muscles here, saur and quadratus, but they more rightly belong to the Muscles of the back.

Amongst the containing parts of the Abdomen, the last is the Peritonae­um, a Membrane so called which compasseth the Bowels about; nei­ther doth it only compass them, and keep them in, but also (by the consent of no small Authors) investeth them with their common skin, by reason of the variety of its Scituation, it hath veins and arteries from the Phrenici, the Muscles of the Loyns, the Mammaries and Epigastricks, it hath Nerves from the Vertebrae of the Breast and Loyns, neither is this Membrana single, for about the Reins, Ureters and Bladder, it is manifestly double, the forepart of it is thinner, it is thickest towards the back, in both places it is strong, also by affluxion of humors it some­times swells to the thickness of the skin, shewing a double tunicle eve­ry where by reason of the humors within, being then alike in thick­ness to the Membranes which compass the bowels about.

The Peritonaeum passeth not only to the Gula of the Vessels above and beneath, and such as outwardly compass about the child in the womb, but also to the worm-like Ligaments of the womb: Also in the Body of man, its processes are considerable, for it gives two tunicles, in which the Spermatick Vessels and Testicles are wrapped; It is joyned in many places, both to the parts under it, and the Muscles neer it to the Dia­phragma, and the upper Vertebrae of the Loyns, from whence it is held to take its beginning.

Place here the Table of the first Chapter, which hath the Number 1. at the corner of the brass Plate.

[Page]
THE TABLE OF THE SECOND CHAPTER UNFOLDED.

This Table laies open the Bones of the Abdomen in seven Figures: two others, to wit, the eighth and ninth shews the Muscles of the Abdomen: The tenth gives you a cleer sight of the Parts, the Peritonaeum being removed.

FIG. I. Expresseth the five Vertebrae of the Loyns, as they are observed on the fore part.
  • a a a a The Transverse Process.

FIG. II. Laies open to your view, the Vertebrae of the Loyns, as are presented on the back Part.
  • a The hole for the Marrow of the Back.
  • b b The transverse Process.
  • c c c c The oblique Process.
  • d The acute Process.

FIG. III. Represents the internal face of the Os Coxae, as it is united in such as are grown up.
  • A Os Ilium.
  • B B Os Coxendix.
  • C Os Pubis.

FIG. IV. Demonstrates the external face of the Os Coxae.
  • A Os Ilium.
  • a a The Spine of the Os Ilium.
  • B Os Coxendix.
  • C C Os Pubis.

FIG. V. Gives the internal view of the Os Sacrum divided into six parts.
  • a a a a The holes which give passage to the Nerves.
  • b The three parts of the Coccyx.

FIG. VI. The same Bone externally to be seen.
  • a The hole for the Marrow of the Back.
  • b b b Lesser holes for Nerves.
  • c Os Coccyx.

FIG. VII. The Figure which deciphers the Os Coxa, as it is observed to be distinct in Children.
  • A Os Ilium a little taken from the rest.
  • B B Os Coxendix.
  • C C Os Pubis.
  • a a The cleft distinguishing the Os Coxendix and Os Pubis.

The connexure of all the Bones of the Abdomen, see in the Table to Chapter 17.

FIG. VIII. A The Muscle of the Abdomen obliquely descen­ding, in which
  • a a Are the toothed beginnings.
  • b b The Tendon sticking to the white Line.
  • E The Muscle of the Abdomen obliquely ascen­ding, in which
  • c c c Its beginning.
  • d d A portion of its tendon which covers the right Muscle.
  • e e The right Muscle of the Abdomen.

FIG. IX. A The transverse Muscle loosed about the be­ginning, in which
  • a a a The beginning.
  • b b A portion of the Tendon.
  • B The right Muscle of the Abdomen, in which
  • c The Beginning.
  • d d d The Nervous inscriptions.
  • e The end.
  • C The back part of the other right Muscle, in which
  • d Shews the Vein and mammary Artery descen­ding.
  • e The Epigastrick vein and artery ascending.
  • f The Anastomosis of the veins.
  • g g The Peritonaeum laid bare from the muscles.
  • D D The Pyramidal Muscles.
  • E E The Process of the Peritonaeum descending to the Cods.

FIG. X.
  • A Part of the Pectoral Muscle detected.
  • B The Sternum.
  • C The Stomach being something hid by the Li­ver.
  • D The Liver.
  • E The Omentum in its Scituation.
  • b A portion which sticketh to the Liver.
  • c c A portion which is knit to the bottom of the Stomach.
  • d d d The remainder of the Omentum as it lies up­on the Bowels.
  • F F The Bowels in their scituation.
  • G The Navil Vein.
  • H The Ligament of the Bladder composed of the Urachos, and the two Navil arteries.
  • I The bottom of the Bladder.
  • a a a a The Peritonaeum divided.
[Page]

CHAP. 3. Of the Omentum, Stomach, and Guts.

HItherto of the external part of the Abdomen; we come now to the internal parts; of which, some perform the office of pub­lick digestion, others the labor of begetting and conceiving the Child. Those dedicated to publick digestion are, the Stomach, Sweet-bread, Liver and Spleen; Subservient to these are, the Guts, Omentum, Gall, Reins, and Bladder: The Vessels which respect the Generation, are, the Spermatick Vessels of both Sexes, the Privities of Men, the Womb of Women; of which we shall speak severally as they come to Anatomical view.

The first of the internal parts that comes to view is the Omentum, which the Ancients called Epiploon; it is a double Membrane filled with fat, which is joyned to the Stomach about the bottom, and spread over the Guts, that it may cherish those bloodless parts by its gentle heat. Au­thors deduce its inferior wing immediately from the Peritonaeum, its su­perior from the common tunicle of the Stomach; it hath Veins from the Vena porta, and the superiour wing hath the Gastroepiploica, both right and left, which are common to the stomach also; the inferior wing hath the right Epiploica and the Postica. Its Arteries are derived from the Coeliacal branch, and the Mesenteriack. Its Nerves are few and smal, and come from the plexure of the sixt pair of the costal Nerves, and all this is that it might not be destitute of nourishment, life and sence. It hath Glandulae scattered here and there, sometimes more, sometimes fewer, which like Sponges take away the superfluous moisture there­of.

Its largeness is various according to the diversity of Bodies; In some it is not stretched below the Navil, and in some it is; the fatter it is, the heavier it is, so that in very fat Women it causeth barrenness: In all it is double, and the Tunicles being taken away between the Sto­mach, Spleen, and the Gut Colon, it often give a receptacle to wind and serosus humors. Its fatness takes away its natural coldness and driness, and yet in falling down it is very subject to putrifaction for this very reason, It is joyned to the round lobe of the Liver, to the Sweet-bread, Spleen, and bottom of the Stomach, to the Gut Colon, which its office is to cherish.

The Omentum being taken away, the Stomach appears, being an Orga­nical part of the inferior Ventricle, which converts the foot being ta­ken and well chewed by the teeth into a white substance which the An­cients called Chyle; it consists of a three-fold Membrane, which is stret­ched out when it receives in meat, and contracted again when it is dige­sted; the outward Membrane is called common, and it is supposed to [Page 10] receive it from the Peritonaeum; the middle Membrane is more fleshy, that so it may retain the more heat; the inner is fuller of Nerves and is the very same that cloatheth the inside of the pallat, this is wrinkled and unequal for the better embracing the meat, and that it may not be suddenly vexed with the acrimony of juyces, it is defended with a mucilaginous crust, a delicate variety of Fibrae, is both in the middle and inner tunicle, stretched out, rightly, obliquely; and orbicularly, which gives solid strength and easie motion to it.

The stomach receives veins partly from the trunk of the Vena porta, partly from the branches thereof, both from the right, which is called the Mesenterick, and from the left, which is called Splenical: From the trunk of the Vena porta ariseth the vein which is called Vena gastrica dextra; others call it Pylorica, and it is divided about the lower Orifice of the stomach; from the Splenical branch ariseth the vein called Gastrica major, which compassing about the superiour region of the stomach, and the superior Orifice in form of a Crown, is called Coronaria, and by cer­tain Anastomosis joyns it self to the Pylorica, then the lesser Gastrial veins, and the short vessel, or short vein, which is sometimes within, sometimes without the Spleen, is stretched out towards the bottom of the stomach; sometimes it is not single but manifold. Lastly, the vein called Gastroe­piploica sinistra, which comes from the lower branch of the Splenical vein is distributed to the left side of the bottom of the stomach, as also to the Omentum: from the Mesenterick branch ariseth the vein called Gastroe­piploica dextra, which also is distributed to the bottom of the stomach, partly before and behind, and partly to the Omentum, and it receives Gastroepiploica sinistra by Osculations. All these you may see cleerly de­lineated in the Table of the following Chapter, figure the sixt.

The Arteries of the Ventricle or stomach, arise from the Coeliacal branch of the great Artery, from its right, and especially its left bran­ches, and keep company with the veins like man and wife together: The Nerves give the animal Spirit from the external branch of the sixt pair, both right and left, and are very copious about the upper Orifice; hence comes the sence of that place to be so ready and exquisite, and such a wonderful consent betwixt the stomach and the bowels, for that pair of Nerves, seing it is not bestowed upon the stomach alone, but al­so upon the rest of the parts of the Abdomen makes a great consent be­tween them; we shall speak of it here briefly, but shall describe it and shew it fully in the Theater.

There ariseth a Nerve of the sixt pair within the skul from the begin­ning of the marrow of the back, a little below the fifth pair which seems to arise out of the concourse of very many smal Nervs having passed the Skull, it is knit to a Nerve of the seventh pair, and passeth to the tongue and the Muscles of the bone Hyois, and on both sides it is divided into an external and an internal branch.

The outward branch of the right side, after it hath administred bran­ches to the Muscles in the Neck, then in its progress to the internal Mus­cles of the Larinx, then to the Sphincter of the Throat, between the Ju­gular vein and the Artery called Carotides; it slips under the Clavicula in [Page 11] the breast, certain branches which it sent out being again united; they make that Nerve which is called Recurrens or running back, because running back about the subclavian Artery, neer the right side of the Aspera Arteria, or Wind-pipe, then into the Wind-pipe; then is distri­buted in the Muscles of the Larinx; making its Progresse from thence, and giving smal branches to the Pleura and Pericardium: It is stretched out not only to the external tunicle of the Lungs; but also in the Lungs themselves, to the Branchi of the Aspera Arteria by many branches: At last having obtained the name [Stomachicall] it is divided into two Bran­ches, and penetrating both the Gula and Diaphragma; it embraceth the superior Orifice of the stomach, with a Net like contexture of many small Nerves, and it bestows a smal Branch also upon the Liver.

The Internal Branch of the sixt pair on the right side, strengthens its Fibrae, with a long, red, and callous substance: In its Progresse by the fore-part of the Neck, whilst it applieth to that plexure, which is made of the cervical pairs of Nerves, and taking small Branches from them, growing thick again by its own callous Body, it is carried to the Thorax or Breast; in which descending under the Pleura, neer the roots of the Ribs: A small Branch being taken from each inter costall Nerve (whence it obtained the name Costalis:) at last having passed the Diaphragma, and sent certain small Branches to the Original of the Mesenterium, with the other Internal Branch which is its companion, it produceth a Nervous plexure, variously guarded with callous Bodies, from which by the right Region of the Mesenterium, Branches passe to the Guts to the Omen­tum, Liver, Gall, and right Kidney: The remainder of it, which is free from this plexure, is partly spent upon the os Sacrum; partly upon the bottom of the Womb, and right side of the Bladder.

In like manner is the Nerve of the sixt pair distributed by the left side of the breast and Abdomen; Save only the external branch of it bends back its Recurrens, under the trunk of the great Artery: Besides it sends a spe­cial Branch with very many Divisions to the Pericardium, and the Heart its self; then it passeth to the Nervous plexure of the Mescuterium, part­ly by its self, partly united to the right Stomachical, having first sent a speciall Branch to the Liver. The left internal Branch of the sixt pair, even as the right makes up part of the plexure we spake of before, from which it is carried to the left Region of the Mesenterium, the Spleen, and left Kidney: That part which avoids this plexure is sent to the os Sacrum, the bottom of the Womb, and the left part of the Bladder.

From this admirable pair of Nerves, we return now to the Stomach; the structure of which in Man is single, and the bigness mean: It is mani­fold in Beasts, because their meats are harder in digestion. It is distin­guished into the bottom or Cavity, and the two Orifices, of which that which is uppermost, and on the left side, our Ancesters propperly named the Stomach: It is garnished with many Fibrae, and Nerves cir­culed in an Orb: It is great and thick, and the seat of Natural appe­tite.

The inferior Orifice whichis on the right side, the Ancients called Pylorus, or Janitor; for by this the meat digested passeth to the next [Page 12] Guts as by a gate; the heat of the Bowels, round about the Stomach, quallify its cold and dry Temperature: the Stomach is in form like the Bag of a pair of Bag-pipes; it is placed by the Wisdome of God, in the left Hypochondrium under the Diaphragma: The right part is committed to the Liver, the left to the Spleen, below, it is cherished by the O­mentum, and underneath it lies upon the Sweet-bread, as it were upon a Pillow.

The superior Orifice passeth to the Throat or Gula, about the eleventh or twelfth Vertebrae of the Breast; the right or inferior Orifice passeth down to the Gut called Duodenum, and in this middle space of the Hypo­chondria, in which that Cartilage of the Breast called Mucronata is a little bowed inwards; make a Cavity of the Breast outwards, which the vul­gar Latins call Foveam cordis, and we the pit of the Stomach.

In this place we often feel pains in the stomach, which we falsly impute to the upper Orifice thereof: when indeed they arise either from sharp or corrupt Food, or excrements, sticking about the narrow passages of the Pylorus; or sent up from the Gall thither. The various affections of the Sweet-bread being neer to the Pylorus, ad no small part to this trouble; as also the faults of the Cartilage called Mucronata, whether it turn its poynt inwards or outwards.

Now will we give this breife description of the Gula, which is also called Osaphagus; although it might more fitly be described with the As­pera Arteria, and the Lungues: Yet we will not separate those parts in word which Nature hath joyned together in deed. It is the channel by which both meat and drink descends to the Stomach: It is composed of just as many Membranes as the Stomach is.

About its beginning, it is moved by three pairs of Muscles, and the Sphincter, which causeth the deglution, or gulping in swallowing: The first pair is called Cephalopharigigaeus; sent from the confines of the Head and Neck, and is stretched abroad in the Tunicle of the Pharingaeus: The second pair is called Sphenopharingaeus, which inclining downwards is extended in the sides of the Oesophagus; the third pair is called Stylopha­ringaeus; it takes its beginning from the appendix called Styliforme, from whence descending with a fleshy and round Body, it ends in the sides of the Gula: Of these the first pair lifts up, the other dilate the Oesophagus: the Sphincter of the Throat, arising from both sides of the buckler like Cartilage, and opening transversly by the back part of the Throat, by stopping the Gula, drives the meat downwards.

It hath veins and Arteries in the upper part, from the jugular veins and Arteries, and from the internal Arteries called Carotides, Nerves from the external branches of the sixt pair; in the Breast it hath Veins from the Branch without a fellow, Arteries from the intercostals, Nerves as before; about the Stomach it hath the same, that it hath at its upper Orifice.

It hath many Glandulae which administer moisture to its membranes, for the easier swallowing, of which the superiour are posited at the sides of the tongue and Larynx, the inferior which are many stick in the breast to the branches of the Aspera Arteria. The Oesophagus takes its beginning [Page 13] from the extremity of the Jaws, where it is joyned to the Larinx, descen­ding streight down to the Breast, first towards the right side, then to­wards the left: It pierceth the Diaphragma about the eleventh Vertebrae of the back, and so is united to the superior Orifice of the Stomach.

As the Stomach is joyned to the Gula, so are the Guts to the Pylorus; they are ordained to take away the burden from the Stomach, to gather to­gether, and cast out the excrements; they are covered with a Membra­nous substance like the Stomach; they have a common tunicle largly ore-spread with the fat of the Mesenterium, for the better conversation of their heat; their propper Tunicle is double, intertexed with diverse strings, which give not only the greater strength; but also the readier, motion; of the propper Tunicles, the middle most is most fleshy, the inner more Nervous, slippery, and filled with wrinkles, both for their safegard, and the better to embrace what they have to embrace.

The Guts have very many Veins; from the right Mesenterical branch of the Vena porta, and also from the left: they have Arteries from the upper and lower Mesentericals, they have Nerves from the sixt pair derived from the Mesenterical plexure: to these come abundance of small passages, for the Distribution of Chyle; which in this age Assel­lius was the first that brought to publique view. Of which more when we come to the Sweet-bread.

The length of the Guts exceed the length of the Body of Man diverse times, and lye in many foldings, that so they may keep what they re­ceive the longer: their Temperature is cold and dry, which is asswa­ged both by the vital Spirit, and the Fat: Their form is, round, that so they may the better admit the Chile, and cast out the excrements; they are underpropped by the Bones, which are gently knit to the Abdomen; but more especially by the Membranous ties of the Mesenterium.

They are divided according to their Tunicles, into thin and thick: The first of the thin Guts Herophilus calls Duodenum; because 'tis the breadth of twelve Fingers: this admits a pore from the Gall, by which sharp humors it is provoked to expell the Excrements; it is of a great largenesse, that so it may unite the large Stomach to the smaller Guts.

Neither yet (if the name please your fancy) are you to begin your Mensuration at the Pylorus, but to determine it at twelve Fingers breadth, that so you may avoid two errors. First, That you give not part of the Janitor to this Gut. Secondly, That you be not led by that foo­lish conceit, that mens Bodies were formerly bigger than they are now; which the Sepulchres of those Kings and Priests in Palestina, those in the Pyramides in Egypt, and those Bodies which have been kept in Arabia in Mummy, many thousand years; not exceeding the Bodies in Europe in bigness, easily witnesseth.

The next of the thin Guts is called Jejunum; because of its emptiness, which the swift descending of the Chyle causeth: where this emptiness ends, the Gut called Ilium begins, and is the third of the thin Guts: It is so called from its manifold rings, or Circumvolections; it is longer than the rest by far, and hath very many Veins, and Arteries; but it is narrow, and thence it comes to passe that the internal Tunicles being [Page 14] broken by a deadly stoppage, it causeth that disease called the Iliack passion: the office of the small guts is to receive the Chyle and keep it that it may the better be distributed.

The first of the thick guts is called Caecum, because it hath no passage into another of the extream guts; this is very small in such as are grown up to age, and hangs like the worm like process to the beginning of the Colon, and the end of the Ilium, and yet it is not to be excluded from the number of the Cuts, because in children 'tis alwaies full of excrements, and performs the same office with the thick Guts

The Colon is the second of the thick Guts, and is larger and wider than the rest, it hath a smal shut which serves to stop the excrements and wind that they may make a little delay in passing downwards: It riseth about the right Os Ilium, and is joyned to the Kidney next to it, from thence bending under the Liver it is knit to the Omentum, the bot­tom of the stomach, the Spleen and left Kidney, from whence bending back it ends in the right Gut; it hath a proper bond of its own by which the order of its Cells are contained; it hath also a special Ligament by which it is knit both to the inferior and superior parts.

The third of the thick Guts by reason of the manner of its extension, is called the right Gut, this by its proper and middle tunicle is far more fleshy than the rest, and full of right strings; the lower part of it is mo­ved by strong Muscles, to wit, Sphincter, by which it is drawn together, and two Levators by which it is lifted up; The Sphincter is joyned to the lower parts of the Os Sacrum, and is spread about the Fundament with fleshy and transverse strings, to which a thin Muscle is joyned both in body and office, in the extremity of the fundament, being about a fin­gers bredth, and as it were compact in the skin. The Muscles called Levators arise from the Ligaments of the Coxendix and Os Sacrum, by a distinct portion they descend to the Sphincter; in men they joyn them­selves to the root of the Yard, in Women to the passage of the Womb.

The Hemorrhoidal Veins are scattered about the right Gut, the in­ternal of which, most usually ariseth from the left Mesenterical of the Vena porta, but sometimes from the right, sometimes from the Spleni­cal branch of the Vena porta, sometimes from within the Spleen, some­times from without; the external Hemorrhoidal veins proceed from the Hypogastrick branch of the Vena Cava, and are distributed to the Mus­cles that move the Fundament.

There are also Arteries which accompany the Veins, part of which come from the inferior Mesenterick branch, and part from the Hypoga­strick Artery, to those smal Nerves adjoyn themselves which proceed from the extremity of the Marrow of the Back, and as it is the com­mon office of the thick Guts to gather the excrements together, and provoke them to expulsion, so it is the property of the right Gut to re­tain them till occasion serve to cast them out.

Place here the Table of the third Chapter, which hath the Number 3. at the corner of the brass Plate.

[Page]
AN EXPLICATION OF THE TABLE OF THE THIRD CHAPTER.

The Omentum and Mesenterium, figure I. The Gula with its Muscles, figure II. and III. The Stomach and Bowels under it, figure IV. The Tunicles of the Bowels, figure V. and VI. The Muscles of the right Gut, figure VII. The Nerve of the sixt pair, figure VIII.

FIG. I.
  • AAAA. The Mesenterium with the Guts adjoyned.
  • aaaa. The Glandulae of the Mesenterium.
  • BBB. The Vessels of the Mesenterium diffused to the Guts.
  • CC. Part of the Colon stretched out.
  • DD. Part of the Omentum drawn abroad up­wards.

FIG. II.
  • AA. The first pair of the Muscles of the Gula, called Cephalopharyngaeus.
  • BB. The second pair of the Muscles of the Gula, or Sphenopharingaeus.
  • CC. The third pair, Stylopharingaeus.
  • DD. The Sphincter of the Throat.
  • EEE. A backward view of the Gula.
  • F The left external Nerve of the sixt pair.
  • G. The right external Nerve of the sixt pair.
  • H. The superior Orifice of the Stomach.
  • III. The bottom of the Stomach.
  • K. The inferior Orifice of the Stomach with a portion of the Duodenum annexed to it.

FIG. III.
  • AA. The Muscles Caephalopharyngaeus conspi­cuous on the fore part.
  • BB. The Muscles Sphenopharyngaeus.
  • CC. The Muscles Stylopharingaeus.
  • DD. The Sphincter of the throat dilated.
  • E. The internal face of the Gula.
  • F. The descending part of the Gula.

FIG. IV.
  • A. The superior Orifice of the Stomach knit to­gether within a threed.
  • B. The inferior Orifice, or Pylorus.
  • CC. The common tunicle of the Stomach separated.
  • D. The middle tunicle of the Stomach.
  • E. The inner tunicle of the Stomach.
  • F. A portion of the Duodenum.
  • GG. The gut called Jejunum.
  • HHH. The gut Ileum as it lies in its foldings.
  • I. The Gut Caecum.
  • KKK. The Gut Colon.
  • L. The shut, being opened in the beginning of the Colon.
  • M. The beginning of the right Gut, knit with a threed.

FIG. V.
  • PP. The common tunicle of the guts separated.
  • Q. The middle tunicle of the Guts, which is the first proper one.

FIG. VI.
  • R. The rugged tunicle of the Guts which is the second proper,

FIG. VII.
  • M. The right Gut cut off.
  • NN. The two muscles called Levatores.
  • O. The Sphincter of the Fundament.

FIG. VIII.
  • ♃. The Nerve of the sixt pair on the right side, in which
  • AA The external and greater Branch.
  • a The branch which is carried to the Neck.
  • b A branch of the seventh pair, joyned to this sixt pair which is carried to the Neck.
  • c A Nerve of the seventh pair joyned to the sixt under the skull.
  • d A branch of the seventh passing to the muscle of the Os Hyois.
  • e A branch from the seventh to the tongue.
  • ff A Nerve from the external branch of the sixt pair, which is carried to the internal muscles of the Larynx.
  • g g The right Nerve called Recurrens.
  • h h Many Nerves distributed to the Lungues and wind pipe.
  • iii The branches of the right Stomachical, stret­ched out.
  • BBB The internal, or costal branch, laid open with its bunches.
  • ▿ The Nervous plexure of the Mesenterium guarded with certain callous Bodies.
  • l l The branch which is carried to the Omen­tum, Duodenum, and Liver.
  • m m The branch which is carried to the right Kidney.
  • n n n n The branches distributed in the Mesenterium and Guts.
  • o The branch which goes to the Os Sacrum.
  • p p The extremity of the internal right branch, which is distributed to the Womb and Blad­der.
  • q r The branches from the internal right side, which make the plexure on that side.
  • ♄ The Nerve of the sixt pair on the left side; in which, the signification of the Letters is the same, save only
  • G Is the Nerve from the left Recurrens, which is distributed to the Pericardium, and Heart it self.
  • ** The Nerve which from the external left sto­machical is carried to the Liver.
  • l l The Nerve which is carried to the Spleen and Gut Colon.
  • m m The Nerve of the left Kidney. The remain­der are the same with the former.
[Page]

CHAP. 4. Of the Mesenterium, Sweet-bread, Liver and Spleen.

THE most wise Creator of Man, hath taken care by the interve­ning of the Mesenterium, that the manifold foldings of the Guts might not come into a confusion, and so mans health be in­dangered thereby; It is a double Membrane, furnished with Glandulae and fat, joyned to the Peritonaeum, fitted to cherish the Bowels as well as to keep them in Office and Order; a famous number of Veins are disper­sed in it from the right Vein of the Vena porta, joyning themselves toge­ther by many Osculations, even before those small branches go to the Bowels. The Arteries are not inferior to these, which proceed from the Mesenterical superior branch of the great Artery, and also from the inferior: It hath many Nerves from the plexure of the internal of the sixt pair, and the Marrow of the Loyns.

To these belong those passages which carry the Chyle, which the first observer of them, called Venae Lacteae because of their white colour; but this as it may be seen in the dissection of live creatures, so the creatures being dead, and the distribution of Chyle ceasing, the whiteness cannot be discerned.

And yet it often happens, that by reason of the intemperancy of men, abundance of humors flowing through so many Vessels, the pores which carry the Chyle are obstructed or (in plain English) stopped, and the Juyce being putrified, it causeth feavers, the cause lying in the Mesen­terium.

The largeness of the Mesenterium is great, being encreased by fat which corrects the cold and dry temperature of the Membranes by heat and moisture; it sticks strongly to the uppermost and third Vertebrae of the Lyons, and binds the foldings of the Guts, every where firmly to its self.

The Sweet-bread [Pancreas] is a Glandulous part of the Abdomen, very profitable for attenuating and purging the Chyle, and preparing it for the Liver and Spleen before it be turned into blood, for as Nature de­duceth the blood it self, which is either for nourishment of the fruit in the womb, or to make seed for the Generation of it, by diverse degrees or steps, even so the Juyce which it turns into blood, it alters it in the mouth, concocts it in the Stomach, easeth it of excrements by the Bo­wels, and by the sweetness of the Sweet-bread, frees from sharp and salt humors, and therefore the Sweet-bread is alwaies full of Chyle, as you may find if you dissect a creature alive, and cut it with a knife.

It receives the Chyle, and having received it, sends it to the Liver; not by any veins or arteries descending from the Vena porta, but by special passages, which by reason of their colour, Asellius named Venae Lacteae, as I told you before: they are long and round Vessels with a very thin Membrane, very small, ascending upwards from the Sweet-bread, to the Liver; about the place where the trunk of the Vena porta descends, they pass downwards to the Guts with very small branches; they have very small shutters which hinders the regress of the juyce they draw to the Guts; the knitting of the Sweet-bread to the Spleen seems ra­ther to perswarde a man that they pass thither than any passage yet found out; and yet it is certain they do pass thither, because they convey a watry portion of Chyle not yet coloured to the Spleen.

The Original of the Venae Lacteae is deduced from no place so fitly as from the Sweet-bread; for as Nature produceth all veins and arteries from the trunk, from which the branches are distributed throughout the Body, so the foundation of the Venae Lacteae is at the Sweet-bread, and the branches pass to the Liver and Guts; and yet the Creator of all things would not bring them into one common Trunk, by reason of the latitude of the Sweet-bread; as the Nerves which are the Organs of the sences though they arise from one spring, yet is their intervals in their originals, the Splenical branch of the Vena porta, and the left Coe­liacal Artery, as also small Nerves from the Gut Duodenum, pass through the Sweet-bread, and yet it hath a proper Vein of its own, from the Vena porta, and Arteries from the left Coeliacal, and a thin skin from the Mesenterium, which incompasseth it round.

Also there is a most observable and singular channel in the Sweet-bread, lately found out by our Versungus, which to a curious eye carries the structure and shew of a vein: It ariseth from the Gut called Duode­num, sometimes in the extremity of the biliar pore, having a common Orifice with an outward shut, sometimes neer the biliar pore, from a distinct place; it is stretched transversly in the Sweet-bread with short, yet very many branches; it is wide at the beginning, and consumes by degrees before it come at the extremity of the Sweet-bread; sometimes it is double in man, but unequal in length, and ariseth neer the biliar pore at about a fingers breadth distance.

The use of this channel is no waies hard to be found out, for seeing it brings a certain sharp juyce not unlike to the Gall, it separates the juyce of its own Nature from the Chyle, and carries it away to the Gut Duodenum, and therefore this being stopped, the Sweet-bread swels by reason of the excrements retained; and so, many vessels being by this means compressed, the Liver and Spleen receive no small damage.

The Sweet-bread in fat men is bigger, and in such as die not through default of Nourishment, it is of a cleer white colour, and therefore of old it was called Lactium: It is stretched out transversly under the Sto­mach towards the Spleen, being more diducted towards the Liver; it hath a wonderful nexure with the Liver, by proper vessels and passages compassed about with a Membrane: It sticks close also to the Duodenum, as though it drew a part of its Chyle from it; its copulation with the [Page 17] Spleen is not so strong, and besides its former offices, it cherisheth the Stomach.

The Liver succeeds this, being a famous part in the lower ventricle, being the shop, or work-house of Blood and Natural Spirit: Its sub­stance is fleshy, like congealed blood, whence Erasistratus gave it the name Parenchyma; in the Embrion like other parts produced of seed, it is white, only the small Veins in it look red, then it looks yellowish by degrees, till at last it get the perfect colour of blood; and yet there are some living Creatures that although the blood in the Veins be red, yet the Liver is white, yellow, or green, it is covered with a thin single Skin, sticking round about close to it.

It hath Veins of two sorts, the superior, or Vena Cava, which by its great trunk carries blood from the Liver, and distributes it throughout the Body: The inferior, or Vena porta, the branches of which are more in number, from which the umbilicate Vein ariseth to the Child in the womb, and without the Liver, the branches the Splenical and Mesen­terical Veins pass, which distribute blood to the Spleen Omentum, Sto­mach, and Guts; a freequent conjunction is made between these, that so the blood may be dispensed the more perfectly, the more easily. Some few Arteries accompany the Veins about the Liver, from the right Coeliacal branch of the great Artery, and two small Nerves from the right internal of the sixt pair, and the external left Stomachical.

The magnitude of the Liver in Man is great, and its figure almost round, it is divided into two parts, bending and hollow; the first be­ing bowed, fits its self to the levity of the Diaphragma, the other is in­ferior, and more unequal, for it sticks out in a Lobus, and is hollow with a double Sinus, the one of which holds the Gall, the other embra­ceth part of the Stomach: Lastly, by a notable cleft it sends out the um­bilicar Vein, which in Men grown up, is hardned to a Ligament. The temperature of the Liver is hot and moist, that so it may the better concoct the blood.

Above, it is joyned to the Diaphragma, and to the Cartilage of the Breast called Mucro nata, by a strong Membranous Ligament: backwards it is joyned by the Peritonaeum to the Vertebrae of the loyns; below, it sticks to the Abdomen by the umblicar Ligament; it is placed under the Diaphragma and the Cartilages of the ribs, on the right side of the Abdomen, and embraceth the Stomach, and cherisheth it by its kind heat.

The Gall is joyned to the Liver, and is the receptacle of the cholle­rick juyce of the Blood: It is composed of two Membranes, whereof the outer is common to the Peritonaeum; the inner which is propper to the Gall, is thicker and furnished with Fibrae of all sorts, for its better moti­on, and greater strength: Also it is defended, with a certain crust against the acrimony of the substance it contains. It hath Veins from the Vena porta, and small Arteries from the right Goeliacal. It hath a Nerve from the plexure of the Costalls: it hath peculiar passages into the Liver, be­tween the roots of the Vena Cava and Vena porta, whereby it draws its Choller.

It is divided into the bottom which is wider, and the Neck which is narrower: a narrow channel goes from the Neck of it, with shutters to keep the Choller from running back, which ends in the biliar pore; the narrowness of which is the cause that often times the thick excrements of the Gall breads stones in it, though not very hard ones, sometimes round, sometimes angular; and sometimes like a Mulberry both in co­lour and form. The Gall is in the right Sinus of the Liver, and firmly joyned to it, both by its upper and middle part.

The Biliar pore is something larger than the channel of the Gall, and carries Choller from the Liver to the Gut Duodenum: It is carried into the Duodenum by an Oblique flexure between the Membranes; usually 'tis single, but sometimes double towards the end: It seldom reacheth to the Pylorus, and as Nature expels choller by the channel of the Gall at set times: by this pore it is administred by degrees, and continually, both when the Chyle is distributed, and before; as is cleer in the dissecti­on of Creatures alive.

The Ancients held Choller to be the poyson of the Body, the worst ex­crement of Blood, and that not a few living Creatures wanted it; because they could find no Gall anexed to the Liver: but all Creatures that have Blood, have this Biliar pore, and if the Body be disposed according to the law of Nature: this hot and sharp humor both defends the Chyle from putrifaction, and causeth the excrements easily to be expulsed, and strengthens the Bowels, by which means health is firmer, and life the longar.

Over against the Liver, is the Spleen, being an Organical part of the inferior Ventricle, which receive the watry, and earthy part of the Chyle to be turned into Blood, its substance is fleshy; yet looser than that of the Liver, being like a Sponge to drink up copious humors, and therefore when it is obstructed, it swells mightily; it hath one single skin which Authors asign to the Peritonaeum, it hath Veins from the Sple­nical of the Vena porta, which are as small as hairs: Its Arteries are more in number, and more famous (by reason of which, it hath much vital heat) and those from the left Coeliacal branch: It hath Nerves from the left branch of the costals of the sixt pair, and from the Nervous plex­ure of the Mesenterium, dispersed by the exterior parts.

The magnitude of the Spleen is bigger in melancholly Men than in others; its temperature, by reason of the abundance of Arterious blood it receives, is hot and dry: It is of a blackish purple colour in youth, of a leaden colour in age; it is in form hollowish in the internal face, gib­bous on the external, and not much unlike to a Neats-tongue; although this be not alwaies, for sometimes it is greater, firmer, with some di­stinct lobes of the colour of thick Blood, so that it seems to be like to the Liver, not only in form, but also in office: Its place is in the left Hypochondrium, a little lower than the Liver, it is knit to the Diaphragma, and to the Cartilaginous ribs, and to the left Kidney, by its bowing part; but by its hollow part to the Omentum, Stomach and sweet-bread, by other vessells, and its own Membranes

All the learned agree, that the office of the Spleen, is to draw the watry [Page] [Page 11] and earthy part of the Chyle: the Blood being made of the purer part, but nature hath clouded the passages by which this is carried to the Spleen, for no observation as yet hath discovered any passages of the Venae Lacteae into it, and that it is not carried by the Splenical Vein, the dissection of Creatures alive witnesseth; as for the Arteries, their office is to carry vital Spirit to it.

And yet it is agreeable to reason that it should draw it from the Sweet-bread it self, though by reason of the smalness of the passages it is not manifest, and it may possibly draw the said juyce from the Stomach, which lies neer it, and for this the substance of the Spleen, its abun­dance of vital Spirit, its sicitasion, and the diseases it is so often molested with, seems to plead.

Place here the Table of the fourth Chapter, which hath the Number 4. at the corner of the brass Plate.

[Page]
AN UNFOLDING OF THE TABLE OF THE FOURTH CHAPTER.

The fourth Table laies down the Scituation of the Sweet-bread, Liver, and Spleen, and the Delineation of the Vena Porta.

FIG. I.
  • A The hollow part of the Liver.
  • B The round convex, or bowing part of the Li­ver.
  • ae The Umbilicar Vein drawn upwards.
  • C The Gall in its Scituation.
  • D The Spleen in its natural place.
  • EE The Sweet-bread in its proper place.
  • FF The Vena Porta descending by the Sweet-bread under the Liver.
  • G The superior Mesenterical Artery.
  • aaaa The branches of the Vena Porta, extended by the Mesenterium.
  • bbbb The branches of the artery distributed by the Mesenterium.
  • HH The Mesenterium it self dismantled of its su­perior Membrane.
  • II The Splenical Vessels laid open, the Pancreas being cut.

FIG. II.
  • AA The Body of the Sweet-bread deciphored in its Natural form.

FIG. III. The back part of the Sweet-bread, together with the Spleen turned downwards.
  • AA The substance of the Sweet-bread, its Mem­brane being taken off.
  • BBB The channel of the Sweet-bread newly found out.
  • C The biliar pore joyned to the channel.
  • DDD A portion of the Guts Duodenum and Jeju­num, cut off.
  • E The common Orifice, by which the biliar pore and channel of the Sweet-bread, open them­selves into the Duodenum.
  • FFF The internal face of the Spleen.
  • GGG The veins and arteries distributed in the Spleen.

FIG. IV.
  • AA The convex or bowing part of the Liver.
  • B The skin of the Liver separated from it.
  • CC The Ligament of the Liver called Septale.
  • DD The large branches of the Vena Cava within the Liver.

FIG. V.
  • AA The hollow part of the Liver turned up­wards.
  • B The Lobe of the Liver by which it joyns it self to the Omentum.
  • C The cleft of the Liver, out of which the Um­bilicar vein descends.
  • E The Umbilicar vein turned upwards.
  • F The Gall placed under the Liver.
  • G The channel of the Gall.
  • HH The biliar pore, with the channel stretched outwards, together with a part of the Duo­denum, noted by M.
  • I The trunk of the Vena Porta descending from the Liver.
  • K The right Caeliacal artery.
  • L A Nerve arising from the plexure of the co­stals.

FIG. VI. The Vena Porta whol, distinguished into bran­ches, as it is publiquely shewed.
  • AAA The trunk of the Vena Porta; A the inferior portion, descending from the Liver. AA the deduction of it to the right and left with an infinite number of smal branches.
  • B The Splenical branch, divided first into great, afterwards into very many smal branches, and distributed like strings about the Spleen.
  • C The right Mesenterical branch.
  • D The left Mesenterical branch.
  • aa The Umbilicar vein,
  • b The vein of the Gall.
  • c The vein of the Sweet-bread.
  • dd The vein called Gastrica dextra.
  • eee The greater Gastrica sinistra.
  • fg The lesser veins called Gastricae sinistrae.
  • h The vein called Vas breve.
  • ii The vein called Gastroepiploica sinistra.
  • KK The vein called Gastroepiploica dextra.
  • ll The Hemorrhoidal veins produced here from the right Mesenterical branch of the Vena Porta.
  • m The vein of the Duodenum.

FIG. VII.
  • A The convex part of the Spleen laid open.
  • BB The Membrane of the Spleen separated.
  • CC The black substance of the Spleen.

FIG. VIII.
  • AAA The hollow part of the Spleen which receives the Vessels.
  • B The Splenical vein with its three branches.
  • C The Splenical artery divided in like manner be­fore it enter the Spleen.
[Page]

CHAP. 5. Of the Kidneys, Ureters, and Bladder.

THe most wise Creator of the Body of Man hath ordained the Reins, or Kidneyes, to receive that thin moisture which is redun­dant in the making of Blood; they consist of a thick fleshy sub­stance, least the continual, and copious flowing of moisture to them should weaken them: If you would search into them, you must of necessity remove the Membranes wherewith they are covered, and they indeed are two; the one external, common to the rest of the bowels by the Peri­tonaenum, the other internal; the external is endewed with much Fat, which gave names to the Veins and Arteries Passing to it.

Besides them, on both sides is a glandulous Body, which is called Glan­dula renalis, Ren. Succenturiatis, and the Capsula of melancholly: It is com­passed about with a thin skin, furnished with vessels of all sorts: the right Glandula often receives a Vein from the trunk it self of the Vena Cava, which is short, yet wide, going into its Sinus with a wide Orifice, and sometimes it takes it from the next emulgent Vein, as the left doth; its Arteries proceed from the emulgents, and Nerves from those which are communicated to the Kidaeyes, their magnitude is not alwaies a­like, [Page 20] they are usually as big as that drug we call nux Vomica; if the Man be any thing ancient, their form is like the Kidneyes, long, and somewhat depressed; somtimes the upper part of them is angular: they have a Cavity within filled with black and melancholly matter, their colour is sometimes reddish, and sometimes like Fat.

They are placed under the Diaphragma, above the fatty Membrane, so as the right is joyned to the Vena Cava, the left is a little under the sto­mach; what their use is, is not yet suffciently found out; 'tis suppo­sed that they help the passage of the serosus moisture, and contract a part of the melancholly, which like a Runnet helps to seperate the urine from the Blood, also to underprop and cherish the parts next it; al­though sometimes there are more and lesser Glandula furnished with Veins and Arteries, which Nature disposeth about the Kidneyes.

But the internal and propper Membrane of the Kidneyes, binds the Kidneyes themselves straight about: To which Kidney come large ves­sels, to wit, a Vein, and an Artery, both of them known by the name Emulgent: The Emulgent Vein is something unequal in scituati­on, proceeding from the trunk of the Vena Cava, being double at first, and then dispersed in diverse divided Branches: also the Emulgent Ar­tery is almost as big as the Vein, and ariseth from the trunk of the great Artery, and brancheth it self into the Reins as the Veins do: the num­ber of the Emulgent vessels is often different, and their progresse to the Kidneyes unequal, Nature providently regarding its own scope; to these some smal Nerves are added, from the plexure of the internal branch of the sixt pair, to which the left Stomachical branch comes.

The Kidneyes have fleshy knobs, called Papillares, because they are like tears, they are about the bigness of a Bean, and about ten in num­ber, disposed with certain intervals, that so by their smal pores the urine may pass cleer to the ureters.

Also the Creator of Man hath formed two Kidneyes, by reason of the multitude of humors they are to seperare, and that if either of them be at fault, the other might be subservient to him; they are in form like to a french Bean (which from them, were called Kidney Beans) outwardly bowing, inwardly unequally hollow: It is monstrous when both of them stick together, or when they are so bowed that both ends touch, or when either of them is double; yet their surface is often unequal by reason of Glandulae that stick to them, in the conception, and remains e­ven in age▪ The copiousness of water that continually flows to the Reins, mitigates their hot and dry quallity: the right Kidney lies un­der the Liver, the left under the Spleen, neer the Muscles of the loyns called Psoas: The right Kidney lies lowest, by reason of the bigness of the Liver, both of them are joyned to the Diaphragma, and loyns by the outward Membrane.

The Ureters receive the urine, being separated by the Reins, and carry it to the Blader, they are round channels composed of a double Membrane, the exterior of which they have from the Peritonaeum for their strength sake; the interior is propper to themselves, strong and Nervous, endewed with many right and oblique strings, they have [Page 21] small Veins and Arteries from the next descending vessels, and small Nerves from the Plexure of the sixt pair, and from the loyns; they are usually in number two, sometimes more, the third descending from the left Kidney neer the second.

They take their beginning from that loose and membranous Sinus, which Authors call Infundibulum renum, from which they pass within the small pores of the Reins, and their extremities being opened, they take in those fleshy knobs called Papillares, which we spake of before, to which they are usually equal in number; then contracting themselves, they descend and pass above the Muscles Psoas, and pass into the Bladder toward the lower part thereof between the Membranes.

The Bladder is an organical part of the inferior Ventricle, which keeps the Urine it receives from the Kidneys, and expels it when the weight or acrimony of it makes it troublesom; it consists of a three-fold Mem­brane, the external of which, the Peritonaeum bestows, the other two are proper to its self, of which the middlemost is thickest and full of fleshy strings, and is of great concernment for the expulsion of the Urine; the innermost is thin and quick of sence, and defended from the sharpness of the Urine by a mucous crust: It hath veins and arteries from the Hy­pogastricks; Nerves from the lower internal branches of the sixt pair which touch not the plexure of the Mesenterium, and also from the Os Sa­crum, not only age, but also its violent stretching alters its magni­tude.

It is divided into the bottom and the neck; the bottom is the su­periour and wider part of the Bladder, from which the Ʋrachos passeth to the Navil; which is wider towards the bottom, but grows slender by degrees towards the Navil; this when man grows to any age, together with the Umbiliar Arteries, makes that strong Ligament of the bladder, by help of which the bottom of it is detained, which else would be depressed by the Bowels lying upon it, (which see more at large in the Tenth Figure of the Second Chapter) and yet sometimes it happens even in ancient people, that the Ʋrachos being loosned by some violent means, gives way to the Urine by the Na­vill.

The neck of the Bladder is the inferior part, more narrow, more fleshy: The strings of this being cast in a circle, makes the Sphincter which shuts the passage that the Urine may not flow from us whether we will or not: The Bladder hath three passages, of which, two are obscure, by which the Urine passeth into it by the Ureters; one greater, by which it passeth out: It is in form like a Pear, and possesseth the bottom of the inferior Ventricle; the bottom of it is faste­ned by the Ʋrachos, the Neck in Men to the right Gut and the Glandulae prostatae; in Women to the Neck of the Womb and the Os Pubis.

Between the Bladder and the Reins, in the publick order of Disse­ctions, there is worth the observation, the descending Trunks of the Vena Cava and the great Artery, although Nature seldom keep the same order in the number, magnitude, and scituation of the branches. The [Page 22] Vena Cava after it hath sent out the Emulgent under the Diaphragma, and the Spermatical veins passing downwards, it sends out three or four Lumbals and distributes them to the Vertebrae of the Loyns, and the mar­row included in them, the superior of which passing upwards are joy­ned by Anastomosis, to the descending branches of the internal Jugular a­bout the Os Sacrum; the Trunk of the Vena Cava being placed under the great Artery, is divided into two great branches which are called Iliacks, to wit, the internal and external, from which the superior Vena Muscula, and Vena Sacra proceed. From the internal Iliack branch, which is the least, ariseth the Muscula Glutea, and the famous Hypogastrick vein, which gives branches to the longitude of the neck of the Womb, to the Muscles of the bladder and right Gut, and to the Os Sacrum: from the external Iliack branch, which is the greatest, after the internal Iliack the Epigastrick vein, which is double in Women and proceeds to the neck of the Womb and the Privities, the remainder of it after it hath passed the Abdomen, makes the Crural branch, which we shall speak to here­after.

The progress of the great Artery is not much unlike to this, for af­ter it hath brought forth the former Mesenterick Artery; then the Coeliacal; afterward, the Emulgent, Spermatick, and inferior Mesente­rick, the Lumbals, and that which is called Sacra: It is divided about the Os Sacrum into Iliack Branches, of which the interior produceth the Arteries, Muscula and Hypogastrica which keep the same pace with the Veins; the exterior brings forth the Epigastrick and the Pudenda, that which is remaining descends to the Legs, and makes the Crural Arte­ries.

Of these Veins and Arteries, see more in the last Chapter of the Book.

Place here the Table of the fifth Chapter, which hath the Number 5. at the corner of the brass Plate.

[Page]
AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF THE FIFT CHAPTER.

The present Table laies open the Reins with their Glandulae, the Emulgent Ves­sels, Bladder and Ʋreters. Also the rise and progress of the Spermatick Vessels.

FIG. I.
  • AA The Glandulae of the Reins, or the Capsula of Melancholly.
  • B The right Kidney uncovered of the Membrane.
  • C The left Kidney.
  • D The descending trunk of the Vena Cava.
  • E The descending trunk of the great artery.
  • FF The right Ureter.
  • GG The left Ureter.
  • HH The right Vessels preparing the Seed.
  • II The left Vessels preparing the Seed.
  • K Part of the Bladder, besides which, the Vessels carrying the Seed are turned in the Abdo­men.
  • L Part of the right Gut cut off.

FIG. II.
  • AA The common Membrane of the Reins which is bespred with fat.
  • BB The Glandulae of the Kidneys.
  • C The right Kidney.
  • D The left Kidney.
  • E The proper skin of the Kidneys partly separa­ted.
  • F The trunk of the Vena Cava descending.
  • G The trunk of the great artery descending.
  • H The left Emulgent Vein.
  • II The right Emulgent Vein.
  • aa The right Emulgent arteries.
  • bb The left Emulgent arteries.
  • c The left Spermatick artery.
  • d The left Spermatick Vein.
  • e The right Spermatick Vein.
  • f The right Spermatick artery.
  • g The Fatty Vein arising from the Emulgent.
  • h The fatty artery.
  • KKKK The Ureters on both sides.
  • LLLL The Vessels preparing the Seed.
  • MM The Scrotum with the testicles in it.
  • NN The Vessels carrying the Seed.
  • O The Bladder stripped of his external tunicle.

FIG. III.
  • A The Capsula, or right Glandula Renalis.
  • BB A Vein from the trunk of the Vena Cava co­ming into it.

FIG. IV.
  • A The Capsula dissected.
  • BB The hollowness of the Capsula somewhat laid open.

FIG. V.
  • AA The internal face of the dissected Kidney.
  • BB The Emulgent Vein with his branches distri­buted in the Kidney.
  • C The Emulgent artery in like manner distribu­ted.

FIG. VI.
  • AA The Kidney dissected.
  • B The Sinus of the Ureter about the Kidney.
  • C The round form of the ureters descending from the Kidneys.
  • DD The narrow passages of the ureters.
  • EEE The fleshy Knobs called Papillares.

FIG. VII.
  • AA The common tunicle of the Bladder drawn back.
  • BB The middle tunicle and bottom of the Bladder.
  • C The inner tunicle which appears when the Bladder is cut.
  • D The Orifice of the bladder by which the U­rine passeth out.
  • EE The Neck of the Bladder which seems swelled by reason of the Prostatae joyned to it.
  • FF Part of the Ureters that come to the Bladder.
[Page]

CHAP. 6. Of the Instruments of Generation in Man.

BY these Organs the Nutriment is wrought or made by which the frail Nature of Man is sustained, which perishing by age is sustai­ned by posterity.

Of these in Men, some perfect the seed, others sow it in the fruitful field of Nature being perfected: of the first are the preparing vessels, the Pampiniforme, the Epididymides, the Testicles, the Parastatae, the Vasa deferentia, and the vessels that keep the seed: Of the latter are the ves­sels that cast out the Seed and the Yard.

The preparing vessels are two veins, and as many arteries; the right of the veins ariseth most commonly from the Trunk of the Vena Cava, ei­ther with a single or double root; the left most commonly ariseth from the left Emulgent, so that in their original the scope or pastime of Na­ture is observed. The Arteries most commonly arise from the Trunk of the great Artery, and pass down ward being mixed with the veins; they enter the Peritonaeum, and by their manifold plexure they make the bo­dies called Pyramidalia, because from a narrow beginning they become broad like a Pyramide; they are called also Pampiniformia because they are curled like the Claspers of a Vine, from thence they tend down­wards, and are distributed to the Epidydimis and the Testicles.

The Epididymides are small, white, hard glandulous bodies, covered with the common tunicle of the Spermatick Vessels, they are longish and hollowish, where they are committed to the Testicles, sometimes they are so big that on the one or other side they represent another Te­sticle; they lie neer to the Testicles, to whose proper Membrane, with very many strings and passages they are joyned; here is also a nexure found about the extremity of each Testicle, for they lie rather in the middle space than stick to them; their office is to give their first rudi­ments of Seed to the blood the preparing vessels bring in, and commit it to the Testicles for the perfecting of it.

The Epididymides are the Testicles joyned, so called, because they wit­ness strength and man-hood; they have a glandulous white and soft substance, having small Veins and Arteries from the Spermaticks, most neatly distributed in them; they have Nerves partly from the internal branch of the sixt pair, which declines the plexure of the Mesenterium, partly from the marrow of the back, that they may have sence as well as life and nourishment; they are compassed about with a proper Mem­brane of their own, strong and thick, which because it is white in color, they call Albuginea; the Divine Creator hath formed two of them, that so the work might be done by the other when the one languisheth, or is deficient.

In respect of manifest quality; they are hot and moist, not because they have a fountain of heat which they distribute to the body, for the changes that happen to the Body when they are lost, either in voice, temperament, or strength, comes through defect of any Natural heat flowing from the stones, but from the oppression of that copious matter which useth to be converted into Seed: in form they are almost oval, both for security sake and also for capacity; they hang in men without the Abdomen that so they might not be so lustful, and that the matter whereof the Seed is made, might be the better perfected by the length of the passage, to which the Testicles ad strength and fruit­fulness.

For it is an error to hold that their hanging down conduceth any thing at all to the casting out of the Seed, because the Seed is received from them, being made fruitful by the ejaculating Vessels which are far remote from them; neither do they change, or any way frustrate the office of the Yard; they contain Seed, but such as is very thin, as is seen by Carcasses not consumed by disease nor fasting, and therefore it receives its last perfections in the Seminal vessels, and Prostatae.

To the Epididymides are joyned the Parastatae Variciformes, so called be­cause they resemble the form of veins when they are swelled, crooked and bowed for the better elaborating of the Seed; they are Nervous and hard in the touching: from these whatsoever is carried upwards into the Abdomen, is turned back to the Bladder, and is called De­ferentia.

For the security of the Testicles hath Nature provided a thing like a sack or bag, called Scrotum, (we in English call it the Cods, and is visible) it is divided by a line in the midst, neither is the composition of it single, for it hath a skin with its scarf-skin, and a Membrana Carnosa, close knit to the skin and wrinkled with it, which they call Darton, because it can hardly be separated from the skin: after this is the Elytroides, or proper Membrane which compasseth the Testicles round, and this is a process of the Peritonaeum, and is double as the Testicles are.

The external part is furnished with Muscles which from their office are called Cremasters or holders up; also from the fleshy texture of strings a red Membrane is formed, which Authors call Erythroides: the internal part which immediately compasseth about the Testicles; is called Nervea; this being the proper tunicle of the Testicles is sometimes bespread with fat, and so being, is a hindrance to the fruitfulness of the Seed. The Cremaster Muscles arise from the Ligaments of the Os pubis, under the transverse Muscles of the Abdomen; they hold up the weight of the Te­sticles, and bring them to the Spermatick vessels.

We come now to the Vasa deferentia, which are turned toward the back-side of the Bladder, afterwards by degrees dilated into certain Bladders in which the Seed being perfected is kept, they cast out the Seed into the Ʋrethra by a special passage.

The ejaculating vessels are the last of the Spermaticks, which are called Prostatae Glandulosi, they are two fleshy, hard, and firmly joyned bodies, compassed about with a strong Membrane; it is in bigness, almost as big [Page] [Page 25] as a Walnut, and not unlike it in form, one side of it joyns to the Capsulae, from which it receives the Seed, the other side is joyned to the Neck of the Bladder, by many and smal passages, and when the Seed is troublesome either by reason of its quantity or quallity, it casteth it out into the Ʋre­thra.

The Yard was principally ordained that it might cast seed into the bottom of the Womb it consists of a skin and a fleshy Membrane, without any the least fat, least its motion should be retarded, and the sence of pleasure in the act of copulation taken away by moisture.

It is properly made of two Nervous bodies with the Ʋrethra, or vessels through which the urine passeth, and the Glans; its body is long, thick, and of a soft substance, as though it were filled with Marrow; It hath a numerous company of Veins and Arteries, that so it might be furnished with heat and Spirit; It is moved by two Muscles, and they are very short, but thick and strong, deduced from the Nervous begin­ning of the Coxendix. The beginning of the Bodies is from the inferior end of the Coxendix, in the beginning they are disjoyned, afterwards in their progresse joyned by inclosure, and stretched to the Glans of the Yard.

Under these is the Ʋrethra, or channel, which is the passage both of urine and seed; it is composed of two Membranes, of which the in­ternal is thin and exquisite in Sence, which causeth both pleasure and pain; the external is thick endewed with transverse Fibrae, both for motion and strength sake; the Ʋrethra hath two Muscles pretty long, yet slender, their original is from the Sphincter of the right Gut, they terminate about the middle of the channel, and dilate it the readi­er to expel the seed.

In the beginning of the Ʋrethra is a fleshy shutter, which shuts the O­rifices of the Capsulae; this being either broken by unadvised putting a Cattheter into the Bladder, or else gnawn asunder by sharpness of excre­ments causeth an uncurable Gonorrhaea, or running of the Reins.

Famous vessels are communicated to the Yard, Veins, and Arteries, from the Hypogastricks and Pudendae, whereof the one is distributed by the external Skin, the other by its Nervous Bodies; to these is added a double pair of Nerves from the os Sacrum, of which the one is distribu­ted to the Skin, the other to the inner part of the Yard.

The extremity of the Yard is called the Glans, of a fleshy, soft, and Spongy substance, it is covered with a thin Membrane, that so it might be the softer to feeling, and the more exquisite in Sence.

A great part of it is covered with the common coverings of the Body, which is called Preputium, or the fore-skin, which is tied to the under-part of it by the Bridle; this fore-skin grows immoderately in young Children in Egypt and Arabia, that either for Religion sake, or fear of other disadvantages that might thence ensue they cut it off: such as devote themselves to Chastity, hang a Ring in that part which re­mains.

Place here the Table of the sixt Chapter, which hath the Number 6. at the corner of the brass Plate.

[Page]
AN EXPLICATION OF THE TABLE OF THE SIXT CHAPTER.

This Table shews the Spermatick Vessels, the Testicles, the Membranes of the Scrotum, the Yard, the Reins, and Bladder.

FIG. I.
  • A The right Glandula renalis.
  • B The left Glandula renalis.
  • CC The Reins on each side.
  • D The left emulgent Vein.
  • E The right emulgent Vein.
  • FF The right and left emulgent Arteries.
  • G The right Spermatical Vein.
  • HH The trunk of the Vena Cava descending.
  • I The left Iliack branch of the Vena Cava.
  • K The right Iliack branch.
  • L The right Spermatical Artery.
  • MM The trunk of the great artery descending.
  • N The right Iliack branch of the great Artery.
  • O The left Iliack branch of the same.
  • P The left Spermatical artery.
  • Q The left Spermatical vein.
  • RR The left Ureter.
  • SS The right Ureter.
  • TT The Vessels preparing the Seed.
  • tt The same Vessels, in what place the Pampini­formia begin.
  • Ʋ Ʋ The Vasa deferentia passing behind the Blad­der.
  • XX The Scrotum with the Testicles in it.
  • Y The Bladder.
  • Z The neck of the Bladder.
  • aa The two Muscles erecting the Yard.
  • bb The two Muscles dilating the Urethra.
  • c The Body of the Yard.
  • d The Praeputium.

FIG. II.
  • AA The skin of the Scrotum separated.
  • BBB The Membrane called Dartus.
  • CC The external part of the membrane Elytroides.
  • DD The Cremaster arising under the transverse Muscles of the Abdomen.
  • EE The internal or membranous part of the Ely­troides.
  • FF The proper white tunicle of the testicle sepa­rated.
  • f The same joyned to the testicle.
  • G The Glandulous substance of the testicle.
  • H The Vessel called Pampiniforme or Pyrami­dale.
  • II Epididymis.
  • K The Parastate.

FIG. III.
  • oe A portion for the preparing Vessels.
  • AA The Pyramidal Vessels.
  • BB Epididymis.
  • CCC Parastates.
  • D The testicle covered with its proper Membrane
  • E A portion of the Vasa deferentia.

FIG. IV.
  • AA The contexture of the veins and arteries in the Pyramidal Vessel.
  • BB Epydidymis.
  • CC Parastate.
  • DD A portion of the Vasa deferentia.

FIG. V.
  • A The Bladder laid bare from its outward tuni­cle.
  • BB A portion of the Ureters.
  • CC A portion of the Vasa deferentia.
  • DD The Capsulae.
  • dd The end of the Capsulae.
  • EE The Seminal Bladders.
  • FF The Glandulae Prostatae.
  • GG The Urethra.
  • HH The Muscles which erect the Yard.
  • II The Muscles which dilate the Urethra.
  • KK The two Nervous bodies of the Yard.
  • L The Preputium drawn back.
  • M The Glans with its Bridle.

FIG. VI.
  • A The internal tunicle of the Bladder being open.
  • BB Part of the Ʋreters.
  • CC The Orifice of the Ureters as they are diducted into the Bladder.
  • DD The beginning of the Capsulae.
  • EE The Seminal Bladders.
  • GG The Glandulae Prostatae divided.
  • L The hole in the Capsulae passing into the begin­ning of the Urethra, which is covered with a shutter.

FIG. VII.
  • A The Membrane of the nervous body of the Yard separated.
  • B The blackish marrow of the same body.
  • C The Glans laid naked.
[Page]

CHAP. 7. Of the Instruments of Generation in Women.

THE preparation of the Instruments of Generation, is no less in the Body of Women, than it is in the Body of Men, for there are those by which the Seed is produced, and mixed with the Seed of Man being produced, and stirred up for the Generation of the Child; such as regard the Seminal matter are the preparing vessels, the Testicles, the perfecting vessels to which those that cast it out are joy­ned The Womb is for the Conception of the Child.

The preparing vessels are two Veins, and as many Arteries as they are in Man, the right of the Veins proceeds from the Trunk of the Vena Cava, the left from the Emulgent. The original of the Arteries, is from the great Artery, and yet in the beginnings of those, the work of Na­ture is various, as it is in those of Men: these vessels joyn themselves in their progresse, and yet still remain within the Abdomen, and are car­ried partly to the Testicles, partly to the Tubae of the Womb; its bot­tom and Neck in which turning themselves upwards by the Hypoga­strick vessels, they joyn by Anastomosis, and so they subminister matter not only to breed the Child, but also to nourish the parts.

The Testicles of Women are of a Glandulous substance, softer, and fuller of juyce then Mens are, in such as are young, but lesser, and harder in such as are Ancient; they have only one single Skin, but that is very strong, and fastened to the Ligaments of the Womb; about the bottom of it; they have an evident passage to the bottom of the Womb, though it be but short, and another more slender, and not so easie to be seen, to the Neck of the Womb.

There are neither Epididymides, nor yet Parastatae about the Testicles of Women; for the Seed of Women needs not that exquisite digestion that the Seed of Man doth, for the constitution of it is perfect, seeing it gives fit matter to make the Fruit.

Neither yet doth Womens Testicles stand only for ciphers neither, for they receive the matter from the preparing vessels, and turn it into a watry milky substance; as is copiously found many times in their disse­ction, especially in such as were young, and flourishing when they died: This Siminal juyce is carried from the Testciles, partly to the Tubae by small passages like the Venae Lacteae, that there it may be perfected; part­ly to the bottom, and Neck of the Womb, that it may keep them soft and moist, and as the Ancients think to stir the Women up to Venery; although this is only in hotter Natures, and such whose passages are streighter.

To the bottom of the Womb which toucheth the Testicles, the por­tion [Page 27] of Spermatical moisture, the Child being now conceived, is of farre Nobler use, for it bears up the Child, and keeps it from the vio­lent heat of the Womb, and sustains it, that the umbilicar vessels which at first excel a Hair not much in bigness, be not broken by the shaking of the Mothers Body.

The vessels which keep the Seed, and cast it out, are called Tubae, they are two round Bodies joyned to the bottom of the Womb on each side, they are called Tubae because of their crooked bowing like a Trumpet, they are composed of two Membranes, which are common also to the Womb its self, they have Veins & Arteries from the Spermaticals, which are divided into small branches, and Nerves from the same, which creep to the bottom of the Womb. Lastly, as we shewed before, there is a Nervous passage inserted into the bottom of the Womb, which is very seldom extended beyond the longitude of the Tubae.

About the Womb are no Prostatae, nor needs there, because they are no divided Bodies, but joyned by the Tubae, and the Seminal moisture passeth easily into the Womb, as you may easily perceive, if you do but crush one of them with your Finger. Obstructions are freequent in the Tubae, as well as in the Womb; as also swellings, which out of question are causes of Barrenness.

Such Women as are fuitful have a twofold Spermatical matter, the one watry, which moistens and refresheth the Womb, and Fruit in it, the other which is thick in the Tubae, which is mixed with the Seed of Man to make the Conception.

To receive and preserve both Seed and Fruit, is the Womb ordained, it is a part of the inferior Ventricle composed of two Membranes, that so it may be stretched wide when the Child is in it, and contracted a­gain when it is Born; the exterior Membrane it hath from the Peritonae­um, which is strong, and out of danger of breaking, the interior which is propper to the Womb, is full of strings and pores: between these Membranes a fleshy contexture compasseth both the bottom and Neck of the Womb, which in the time of Conception like a Sponge drinks up the superfluous moisture, and is of a wonderful thickness when the Woman is with Child, but else very compact.

Also it sometimes happens, that when the Womb is narrow, and the Child great, or a Mole bred together with the Child, with mighty pain in Child-bearing, not only the thick, but also the thin substance of the Womb with its Membranes is broken, and the child breaks out with its Head, Feet, and Hands, wheresoever there is way made into the Ab­domen, and sometimes it falls down with its whole Body upon the Mo­thers Bowels.

The Womb hath a numerous company of vessels, of which the Veins which accompany the Arteries on the upper part of it, descend from the vessels which prepare the Seed; the middle and inferior parts are supplied from the Hypogastricks, which creeping upwards again, joyn themselves by inosculations to the fore mentioned vessels; the Nerves which come to the superior part of the Womb, are the extream bran­ches of the costal Nerves of the sixt pair; the middle and inferior part is supplied from the Os Sacrum.

Not only age, but also the Sports of Venus and breeding Children alters the bigness of the Womb: the intertexed flesh, and the plenty of Blood flowing thither, alters the cold and dry temper of the Membranes, which is so plentiful, that it administer nourishment to the Child, and flows out monthly at other times: Its scituation is in the lower Regi­on of the Abdomen, where by the concourse of the Os Sacrum, Ilium, Cox­endix, and Pubis, the Pelvis is framed, and for this intent it is larger in Women, than it is in Men, and gives way about the Os Sacrum, and Pu­bis (though the Ligaments be very strong) in the time of travail; for­ward it is joyned to the Bladder and the Os Pubis by the help of the Peri­tonaeum, backwards with the right Gut

Above it hath singular Ligaments and very strong, but loose, least they should be detrimented by the swelling of the Belly when the Wo­man is with Child; the first of these which is in the sides, seems to be a stretching out of the Peritonaeum, it is Membranous, and broad, so that it bends the Tubae, Testicles, and womb, to the Os Ilium, and is like the wing of a Bat, or Flitter mouse; this being immoderatly loosned, or broken by violence, the bottom of the womb falls down upon the Neck, or else into one of the groynes.

The other Ligament is round and Nervous, produced forwards from both sides of the Bottom, and having pierced the Peritonaeum and joyned it self to the Tendons of the Muscles of the Abdomen, above the Os Pubis, it dilates its self into a Membrane, joyns its self to the Clysteris, and loosly binds the bottom of the Womb to the foreparts; but indeed this round worm like Body is something else besides a bare Ligament, for if you diligently mark its structure it consists of a double Membrane, even as the Womb it self doth: it takes its original at the bottom of the Womb, where the Tubae and Testicles are: It is porous within, and to­wards the end it is evidently hollow, and moist, with a watry Seed in such Women as die a violent death, and therefore it is more probable that this Worm-like vessel, when the mouth of the Womb is shut, gives passage to the Seminal Matter from the Testicles to the Neck of the Womb, and casts out excrements by those passages from both Groyns.

The office of the Womb is to receive the Seed, which is the principal of Generation, to keep and cherish it being received, and to bring forth the child into the world, all which it doth by its proper faculty: this will appear more cleerly if we consider the parts of the womb di­stinctly.

It is divided into the bottom, the Neck, the passage, the extremi­ty of which is the Womans Privities. The uppermost part of the Womb is called the Bottom; it is thicker and harder in those that are not great with child, the hand will easily grasp the bigness of it: out­wardly it resembles the form of a Guord, being rather compressed than exactly round, if the Woman hath never been with Child; it hath a small Cavity within, and but one, which is divided into the right and left by a very small line; and yet in this secret lit­tle shop, the Eternall Creator of all things begins and furnisheth [Page 29] the admirable Structure of Man, only by a few drops of Seed.

Where the Womb begins to grow narrower, that is called the neck, and this usually Authors confound with the passage: in this is the Ori­fice of the Womb, called internal, very smal; it is broadish in Virgins and Women which never had child, but round in such as have; this o­pens to receive the Seed, and shuts close when it is received, and it stret­cheth to an extream wideness to give passage to the Child.

To the bottom of the Neck is joyned the passage which is usually cal­led the Neck of the Womb; it is a soft and loose channel with unequal wrinkles, that so it may the better give intromission to the Yard of Man, and extromission to the Child; at the end of it, on the forepart, it re­ceives the neck of the Bladder; behind it is strongly bound to the Sphin­cter of the right Cut.

The remainder of it is terminated in the Privities, in which the two lips are external, then the fleshy and soft productions which Authors call Nymphae and Alae; by these it is defended from external injuries: between these Alae is the Clystoris, a small round Body, made up of two Nervous portions, spongy within; it is endewed with two Muscles on both sides, they are very small, but their office is the same with those that dilates the passage in males; it hath plenty of vessels of all sorts, and is very exquisite in sence, that so by tickling it may cause pleasure in the act of Copulation.

Its unprofitable excrement (which the Arabians call Endemium, the Egyptians, Malum) which sticks out immoderately in young Girls, they cut off and scar: Under the Clystoris toward the internal part of the passage is the passage of Urine, which is short in Women, and hath a smal Caruncle to defend it from cold.

Such Virgins as keep themselves from playing the wantons with themselves, from the use of Venus and other external injuries, have a fleshy skin that covers the passage, guarded with Caruncles, which Anci­ents called Hymen; it hath a cleft in the middle through which the Terms monthly flow, the form of which quite ceaseth after they have had to do with a Man and born Children; this as it is in Infants, and such Virgins as are not Marriagable, we give to the view of such as have chast minds in the fift and seventh Scheam of the next Table. In these, whatsoever is extended upwards by the sides from the inferior angle of the Privities, contains the cleft, and is a laying open of the internal tuni­cle of the passage, which is Membranous with many very smal Veins and Arteries, which in Virgins makes up that fleshy circle like a flower; it is more fleshy in some than it is in other some, so that it represents the form of two Caruncles: It is commonly thin, and the weaker by reason of the defluxions of humors, so that it is broken without much ado. Two fleshy Productions like mirtle Leaves are neer this skin, or else like Almonds, which make the passage the narrower in Virgins, by which, the Caruncle which compasseth about the passage of the Urine is seen.

These things by the Law of Nature being thus constituted, Nature be­ing [Page 30] careful for the defence of Virginity, sometimes frames another thin skin from the inferior angle of the Privities and the sides, which is stret­ched cross the chink like a zone, neither gives it any passage save only neer the passage of Urine, where it is loose and severed from the parts of the Privities: This, men very skilful in Anatomy, have formerly descri­bed for the Hymen; this is but in few, and many Midwives tear it away for an unprofitable excrement: See its form in the sixt Figure of the fol­lowing Table.

Place here the Table of the seventh Chapter, which hath the Number 7. at the corner of the brass Plate.

[Page]
AN EXPLICATION OF THE TABLE OF THE SEVENTH CHAPTER.

This Table shews the Genitals of Women: First of all in their Natural Scituation; then their several Parts out of their Scituation; Lastly, the Hymen and Zone.

FIG. I.
  • a The right preparing Vessels.
  • b The left preparing Vessels.
  • c A portion of the right Gut.
  • d The bottom of the Womb sticking up above the Bladder.
  • e The Bladder.

FIG. II.
  • A The right Glandulae renalis.
  • B The left Glandulae renalis.
  • CC The Kindneys on both sides.
  • DD The right emulgent veins.
  • EEE The right emulgent arteries.
  • FF The trunk of the Vena Cava, divided in­to the right and left Iliack branches.
  • G The left emulgent vein.
  • H The left emulgent arteries.
  • II The right Spermatical vein.
  • K The right Spermatical artery.
  • L The left Spermatical artery.
  • M The left Spermatical vein.
  • NN The trunk of the great artery divided into the right and left Iliack.
  • OO Womens Testicles.
  • PP A portion of the broad Ligament.
  • QQQQ The Tubae of the Womb, depressed on both sides with the Ligament, that so the Testi­cles may appear.
  • R The bottom of the Womb.
  • SS The round Ligaments of the Womb cut off below.
  • T The neck of the womb.
  • Ʋ In the right side, the Hypogastrick vein distributed in the Womb.
  • Ʋ In the left side, the Hypogastrick artery distributed in the Womb.
  • X In the right side, the Hypogastrick artery distributed in the Womb.
  • X In the left side, the Hypogastrick vein distributed in the Womb.
  • Y The passage of the Womb.
  • Z The Bladder depressed above the Privities.
  • aa A portion of the Ureters cut off about the Bladder.
  • bb A portion of the Ʋreters descending cut off about the reins.
  • cc The preparing Vessels dilated about the te­sticles.
  • dd The Vasa deferentia.

FIG. III.
  • AA The bottom of the Womb dissected cross.
  • BB The cavity of the bottom.
  • C The neck of the Womb.
  • D The hole in the neck of the Womb of a Woman which hath brought forth.
  • EE The wrinkled face of the passage of the womb.
  • FF The round Ligaments of the Womb cut off underneath.

FIG. IV.
  • A The right testicle.
  • BB The right Tubae depressed.
  • C The left testicle.
  • bb The passages of the testicles of the womb.
  • DD The left Tubae of the Womb.
  • E The bottom of the womb.
  • FF the round Ligaments of the womb cut off below.
  • G The Bladder inserted to the passage of the womb and stretched upwa [...]ds.
  • HH Portions of the Ureters.
  • II The two musculous parts of the Clytoris.
  • K The body it self of the Clytois.

FIG. V.
  • A The head of the Clytoris stiking out under the skin.
  • BB The external Lips of the Pivities drawn aside.
  • CC The Alae or Nymphae drawn aside.
  • D The Caruncle of the passage of Ʋme besides (a)
  • EE The two fleshy prodixtions like Myrtle Leaves.
  • FF The Membranous containing of the chink.

FIG. VI.
  • A The Membrane drawn cross the Privities vulgarly taken for the Hymo.

FIG. VII.
  • A The Privities of a yong Girl, [...]n which the signification is the same as in [...]he fift figure.
[Page]

CHAP. 8. Of the Fruit in the Womb.

TO the Body of the Mother we adjoyn the contemplation of the fruit in the Womb, because it is a part of it though temporary, as not only the community of substance and nourishment, but also the nexure of the Secundine and Umbilicar vessels to the Womb witnesseth; this Fruit we consider as genuine, and nourished by the Womb, and as being fitting to breath the air, it breaks out from that narrow inclosure.

The small Body of the Embrion is formed by the vital vertue of the Seed of the Man, from which office it is called Plastica; of which, by the appointment of God himself, by his infinite wisdom, goodness and power, he hath left not only obscure foot-steps, but also cleer argu­ments; to this, the heat of the Seed and Nourishment from the Mo­ther administers: the Compendium that doth this great work is very small, not exceeding the bigness of a great Emmet; from which, that is first formed, without which life cannot be preserved, to wit, the Heart, and from it the veins and arteries as from their Basis, afterwards the Liver, and then other parts which come first into use.

That the Heart is first formed before any other part your eyes will witness, if you dilligently contemplate the framing of the Embrion in Eggs; and although the Heart be very little and altogether white, yet [Page] [Page 31] by reason of the blood contained in each Ventricle, it hath a transparent redness to be distinguished from the other parts: The motion of the Heart helps and confirms this, for so soon as any blood is to be seen in the Veins of the Embrion, the Heart being full of blood moves with a swift, yet ordinary pulse; so often as it is dilated it receives blood into its Ventricles; so often as it is compressed, it casts it out, and this ap­pears in the Heart whilst it is white, though something increased. Be­sides, it must first be formed by reason of its singular plenty of heat, which no other part of the Body is equally endewed with. Lastly, ne­cessity requires its first formation, that so by its motion the vital Spirit may be stirred up, increased and distributed to the Body.

The matter of which the first forming sisteme of the Body is produced is the Seminal substance in the Body of the Mother, which passing from the Tubae to the bottom of the womb, to which the Seed of the Man ads heat and Spirit, and to the increase and maintaining of it is the Blood of the Mother required; this comes not at all to that first mixture from the Seed, neither doth it make any Parenchyma, but after an interval of time, the Umbilicar vessels and Heart being framed it is drawn and takes its redness with the Muscles.

Of the parts procreated, some lose their use, others retain it so long as life lasteth; such as lose their use are, the Navil and its Vessels, the the Membranes which compass the Child in the womb, and the Placen­ta; the use of these ceaseth so soon as the Child is brought forth to light.

The Navil is a Membranous ducture, by which the Vein and Arteries arise from the child to the Mothers Womb; both this and the Secun­dine wants Nerves because they have no use of sence: It is of a famous length, even in the very beginning of the Formation, although the big­ness of the Embrion at beginning be no bigger than a great Emmit, or a small Bee; but when the Fruit is ready for extramission, the Navil-string is three spans long, and as thick as ones finger, both for the strength of the Vessels, the perfecting of the blood by its long passage, the com­modious motion of the Child, and the easier drawing out the Secun­dine; it hath no distinct nodes, yet is it wreathed and unequal, for the easier bowing of the included vessels.

The rise of the Navil, is from the middle of the Abdomen, that the inclination of the Head and Breast of the Child might be the readier to­wards the mouth of the Womb; at the biginning of the Embrion it swims in the Liquor of the Amnios, but when it is more perfected it is bo­wed for the most part above the Breast, and produced backwards by the hinder part of the Head to the Fore-head, and joyned to the womb by Membranes and the contained Vessels.

The Vessels contained in the Navil, are, one vein and two arteries; the vein is largest, and takes its Original from the Foundation of the Ve­na porta within the Liver, therefore it descends by the Arteries of the Liver to the Navil, and being divided into very many branches above the Chorion, it joyns its self to the Womb, and carries Blood for the nou­rishment of the Infant: The Umbilicar Arteries take their Original from [Page 32] the Iliack branches of the great Artery, from w ch place being stretched upwards by the sides of the Ʋrachos, they enter the Navil, and are mani­foldly distributed above the Corion with the Veins, they carry vital Spi­rit, and communicates it to the Child.

It is farre enough off from the truth that these vessels passe to the Child from the Mothers womb, and the Membranes adjacent, for in the young ones of Birds, it is easie to be seen that Nature deduceth the Veins and Arteries, from the Fruit it self inclosed in its Secundines, and by degrees divideth them into lesser branches; It doth the like in vege­tables, whose roots come not from the Earth to the Plants, but the Plants send them to the Earth for nourishment, and this is abundantly proved in Bulbous roots that grow out of the Earth; neither comes this opinion neer the truth, that the Arteries & umbilicar vein are framed be­fore the Heart and Liver, for neither Heart nor Liver is made of Blood, but of Seed, and the whole Systeme of the Body is made before any vessels passe from it; for before the Bowels are formed, there is no need of vessels: as the Conception of living Crearures, and the Seeds of Plants evidently demonstrates.

The Ʋrachus is added to the Umbilicar vessels, being a Membranous Body, round and porous within, arising from the Basis of the Bladder, and attenuated towards the Navil, it delivers the Urine from the Blad­der to the Amnios, and yet this seems doubtful to these who behold the solidity of this vessel, the smalness of its pore, and the obscurity of its passage out by the Navil; but so soon as the Infant is born, whatso­ever of the Navil string is left to the Body after it is cut off, its former use ceasing, is turned into a Ligament.

The Membranes which compass about the Child in the womb, are two, of which, that which is next the Body of it is called Amnios, being soft, light, and cleer, gently joyned to the Chorion where the Placenta is; from the very beginning of the Conception, it contains a watry Liquor, which defends the tender Limbs of the Embrion in the violent motions of the Mother,; and in the labour of the Mother the Membranes being broken, it mollifies the passages, and gives the easier extramission to the Child: that this is gathered together between the Membranes, Am­nios, and Chorios, the connexion of the Tunicles, and dilligent observation denies; neither can there come any detriment to the Child, from the sharpness of this humor, seeing the Cuticula easily defends it.

The other Membrane they call Chorion, and it compasseth the whole Child round, on the outside of the Amnios, and is the thicker of the two by odds, it is smooth on the inside, and is furnished with abundance of the Umbilicar Veins and Arteries; In which place (the Child encrea­sing) the Liver or Placenta of the womb ariseth; in Figure it is a soft and Spongy peice of flesh, and hath many branches of the Umbilicar vessels, both to cherish its heat, and nourish its substance.

To these they add the Allantoes, or Skin in which the Urine is kept, although this appears in the Anatomy of Bruites, rather than of Wo­men.

To these Membranes Ancient Authors defend and prove mightily, [Page 33] and as mightily disagree about certain vessels called Acetabula and Cotyle­dones, which some say are, some say are not joyned, some hold them to be the mouths of the vessels swelled with Blood, other pieces of flesh between the Chorion and the Womb, which prop up the Umbilicar ves­sels, and receive the Blood when it flows too fast to the Child, which is conspicuous in the Wombs of Sheep, and the like Creatures.

If we search out what answers to this in women, you must look to Placenta before described, which being hollow on that part next the Chorion, convex on that part which is next the womb, represents the same form, only it is far bigger, and by the softness of its substance, and multitude of its vessels, performs the same office: These are the parts of the Child which are useless after Birth, and are called the After-birth or Secundine.

The parts of the Body which continues still in office, the Child being born, are the same which are in the Ventricles, the unlikeness of w ch the child in the womb, to a mans of age, is here to be spoken off, the Ventricle of the Child in the womb, though it be contracted, yet is it never Empty, but alwaies white and covered over with the Liver. The Guts are seven times as long as the Body, and the Gut called Caecum is filled with excrements; the excrements of the small Guts are Flegma­tick and yellow, those in the great Guts solid and hard, which the An­cients called Meconium: The Liver appears great, and stretched out even to the left Hypochondrium, the substance of it before it grows red, may be seen full of purple Veins, and the Gall under it appears yellow, and swelled: The Sweet-bread is large, and by its bright colour evidently shew the diduction of Chyle, and yet it shews it more cleerly after the Child is born, whilst it sucks. The second Table of this Chapter pre­sents you with its delineaments.

The Glandula of the Kidneyes are of a wonderful bigness, and lye not in the Reins, as they do in such as are grown up, but lye upon them, and embrace the superior part of them; the reins themselves are great, and have very many Glandulae; the Ureters are wide, and the Bladder full of Urine; the bottom of the womb in young Wenches is compres­sed, and the Tubae stretched out, the Testicles great, al which the Se­cond Figure in the forementioned Table Specifies.

The Bowels of the Abdomen which are allotted, for publique digestion, do not want private digestion, but manifestly operate for the common profit of the Infant; for that the Stomach makes Chyle, is manifest by the matter contained in it, and by the various excrements in the fol­dings of the Guts: Although the Sence of Man cannot yet perceive by what passages the substance to be converted into Chyle, comes to the Stomach: The fancies of the Ancients that the Child sucked in at its mouth, being exploded for many difficulties, yet is it agreeable to rea­son, that as in Men, the Liver and Spleen receive whatsoever is to be tur­ned into Blood, so whilst the Fruit is nourished in the womb, the pas­sage of the throat being denied, the Stomach should draw that from the Liver and Spleen which it digesteth, and turneth into Chyle; that the Liver makes Blood in the Fruit is cleer, by the separation of the [Page 34] Chollerick and watry excrement, for although the Blood of the Mo­ther by which the Embrion is nourished be pure, yet is it unlike to the temperature of the Fruit, and therefore stands in need of another sepa­ration and change.

About the Breast, the Veins are very full of Blood; but the most no­table thing in the Heart is, there is a large passage out of the Vena Cava into the Arteria Venosa, or an anastomosis, defended with a Membrane; also a small channel out of the Vena Arteriosa into the great Artery, so that the Blood may readily passe from the right ventricle of the heart in­to the left, these passages as age comes, Nature stops up by degrees, unless some great obstructions of Flegm (as somtimes happens) stop up the vulgar passages: the Heart it self is great, and its ears and vessels large, the Lungues seem Bloody, neither have they as yet obtained their rariety, because of their rest, and yet their Birth being neer, and the place they move in growing loose; the Lungues grow lighter, and gently draw in some air, and this is cleer, because sometimes a sound is heard of the Fruit, not only in Bruits, but also in Women.

The Heart moves in the Embrion so soon as the Mothers Blood flows to it, which it perfects within its Ventricles, and endews it with vital Spirit, that so it may preserve and stir up the faculties of other parts, the parts of the Ears of the Heart is distinct in respect of time from other parts, for they first of all compel the Blood into the Heart by compres­sing themselves, then by dilating themselves draw Blood again.

As for the Head, the neerer a Child is to Birth, the heavier it is, it is distinguished by certain great Bubbles, which to the beholders gave o­pinion, of the three Regions of the whole Body, the balls of the Eyes are great, and stick out; the Brain is almost fluid, and the Nerves very soft; the Bones of the Skul like tender barks, and if you except the fore-head, distinguished by no Sutures. The Crown is covered only with a thin Membrane, till the Bones of the fore-head, and hinder part of the Head are joyned, the passages of hearing, with the adjoyning Bones, Os Cribrosum, and the Horns of the Hyois are Cartilaginous.

And yet (which is strange) such Children as are brought forth in the ninth month; the hardness and greatness of the Bones of the passage of hearing, is almost equal to those in Men of perfect age, and not these only, but that also which is called the Tympanum; the Membrane of which is comprehended with the ring-like Bone, which gives the foun­dation of hearing; also the Labyrinth and Cochlea are not less in bigness, than by proportion of Figure, to perfection, whence it is cleer that a Child soonest obtains perfection of Hearing.

The Bone called Cuneiforme, is divided into four parts; the Bones of the fore-head, and inferior Cheek, are manifestly divided. The teeth lies hid in the Jaws, least the Child in stead of sucking, should bite, the roots of them are soft and mucous, and hide the Fundamentals of the se­cond Teeth.

The Vertebrae have no processes, but consists of three distinct Bones, of which the foremost which is the greatest, is like a Lupine; the two hin­der are less, and by their meeting make that hole for the Marrow of the [Page] [Page 35] Back. The Sternum is divided into four parts, and sometimes into more; as also the Os Ischium, Il [...]um, and Pubis.

The extremity of the Bones which make the Wrest and Ancles are Cartilaginous, and obtain hardness strength, and perfection by age.

Place here the first and second Tables of the eighth Chapter, which hath the Number 8. and 9. at the corner of the brass Plates.

[Page]
AN EXPLANATION OF THE FIRST TA­BLE OF THE EIGHT CHAPTER.

The Fruit in the Womb being often helped by Physical Remedies, requires no less diligent observation than the Body it self of Man: therefore we have given you the representation of it in two Tables according to the Method of Dissections. The first of which, laies open to your view the Umbilicar Vessels, and the Sceleton: The other the Deliniament of the Bowels.

FIG. I. Shews the Child ready to be born, as it lies in a fit posture for extramission.
  • AAAA The parts of the Abdomen dissected and di­stracted.
  • BBBB The body of the womb divided into four parts
  • CCCC The Chorion and Amnios joyned together, and dissected into four parts.
  • D The Child turning its head downwards, which is the natural way of Birth.

FIG. II. Shews the Child taken out of the Womb, the Um­bilicar Vessels, and Membranes separated about the beginning.
  • A The Umbilicar vein distended from the liver.
  • BB The two Umbilicar Arteries rising to the Na­vil.
  • C The Urachus knit to the Navil.
  • DDD The Navil produced even to the Placentum.
  • EE The Amnios separated from the Chorion, under which a portion of the Navil appears.
  • FF The Chorion divided into four parts.
  • GGG The Umbilicar veins and arteries, distributed in the Placenta which are extended above the Chorion, but very lucidly appear under it.

FIG. III. Explains the Secundines, in what part they cleave to the womb.
  • AA The convex part of the Placenta.
  • BBBB The Chorion under the Placenta.

FIG. IV. Shews the Bones pertaining to the Head.
  • AA The bone of the Fore-head distinct from the Suture.
  • BB The two bones of the fore part of the head.
  • C The Crown as yet Membranous by reason of the distance of the Bones.
  • D The inferior cheek divided into two parts.

FIG. V. Shews the ring-like bone of the Infant, to which the Membrane of the Ear called Timpanum is knit.
  •  

FIG. VI. The bones of the Ears, removed a little from their Natural Scituation.
  • A The Mallcus.
  • B The Incus.
  • C The Stapes.
  • D The little bone annexed to the Ligament of the Stapes, first found out by D. Sylvius.

FIG. VII. Exactly represents the Labyrinth and Cochlea of the Ears perfect in all parts.
  • A The Oval hole in the Tympanum, which looks toward the Labyrinth.
  • B The round hole in the Tympanum between the Labyrinth and the Cochlea.
  • CCC The three bony Cavities of the Labyrinth.
  • DD The Cochlea.

FIG. VIII. Shews the internal face of the Cochlea with the Labyrinth.
  • A The oval hole.
  • B The round hole.
  • CCC The three circles of the Labyrinth something o­pened.
  • DD The Cochlea broken, shewing the little inward porous circle.

FIG. IX. The Vertebra of the Infant in three distinct parts.
  • A The first back part.
  • B The second back part.
  • C The third fore part.

FIG. X. Shews the Vertebrae of the Neck, the bones of the Breast as they are seen on the fore part.
  • A Denotes only the upper part of the Sternum, the rest are under it.

FIG. XI. Shews the back, and its Vertebrae, wanting their Processes.
  •  

FIG. XII. Shews the Vertebrae of the Loyns with the bones that make the Pelvis.
  • A The five Vertebrae of the Loyns, whose Proces­ses are yet cartilaginous.
  • B The Os Sacrum composed of six parts.
  • CC The bones called Ilium.
  • DD The bones of the Pubis.
  • EE The bones of the Coxendix.

FIG. XIII. Expresseth the bones of the whol hand.
  • abd The Appendices of the bones, yet cartilaginous.
  • c The bones of the wrest all cartilaginous.

FIG. XIV. Represents the bones of the whol Foot.
  • abd The Appendices of the bones which are carti­laginous.
  • c Certain Cartilaginous bones of the Instep.
[Page]
[Page]
THE SECOND TABLE OF THE EIGHT CHAPTER UNFOLDED.

This Table comprehends all the Bowels which are found in the Abdomen, and Breast of the Infant.

FIG. I. Singularly expresseth the Lacteal Veins, as they are represented at a single view.
  • AAA The hollow part of the Liver.
  • B The Gall.
  • CC The umbilicar vein bowed upward.
  • DD The Stomach turned upwards.
  • E Its lower Orifice tyed with a string.
  • F A portion of the Jejunum cut off neer the Pylorus.
  • GGG The Pancreas of a famous bigness.
  • H The Spleen.
  • II The right Kidney covered with the common Membrane.
  • K The left Kidney in like manner covered.
  • LLL The Mesenterium stretched abroad.
  • MM &c. The Guts knit to the Mesenterium.
  • aaaa Certain Lacteal veins stretched from the Sweet-bread to the Liver, whereof few, and those the least of them are here expressed.
  • bbb &c. Lacteal veins distributed from the Sweet-bread to the Guts, and those bigger.
  • ccc &c. The Meseraick branches of the Vena porta.
  • dd &c. Branches of the Meseraick arteries.

FIG. II.
  • A The right Renal Glandula.
  • B The right Kidney.
  • C The left Glandula of the Reins.
  • D The left Kidney.
  • E The Vena Cava descending.
  • FF Its internal Iliack branches.
  • GG The external Iliack branches of the Vena Ca­va.
  • HHH The great artery with its external Iliack bran­ches.
  • II The internal branches of the great artery.
  • KK &c. Both Umbilicar arteries bent downwards.
  • L The bottom of the womb compressed.
  • M The neck of the womb.
  • N The bladder turned downwards.
  • O The Urachos.
  • P The node of the Navil cut off.
  • a The vein of the right Renal Glandula.
  • b The artery of the right Renal Glandula.
  • c The right emulgent artery.
  • d The right emulgent vein.
  • e The right spermatical vein.
  • f The right spermatical artery.
  • g The left artery of the Renal Glandula.
  • h The left vein of the Renal Glandula.
  • i The left emulgent vein.
  • k The left emulgent artery.
  • l The left spermatical vein.
  • m The left spermatical artery.
  • nn The Vessels preparing the Seed.
  • oo The testicles of a great magnitude.
  • pp The broad Ligaments of the womb.
  • qq &c. The Tubae of the womb bowed down.
  • rr The round Ligaments of the womb cut off below.
  • ss Portions of the Ʋreters cut off.

FIG. III.
  • AA The Lungues diducted on both sides.
  • B The Heart whol.
  • C The trunk of the great artery coming from the Heart.
  • D A portion of the same artery passing down­wards.
  • E The Vena Arteriosa stretched from the Heart.
  • aa The channel between the Vena Arteriosa and the great Artery.
  • b The beginning of the right subclavian artery.
  • c The beginning of the right Carotides.
  • d The beginning of the left Artery Carotides.

FIG. IV.
  • AA The Lungues diducted.
  • B The Heart cut towards the right Ventricle.
  • C The Vena Cava opened neer the Heart.
  • D Anastomosis between the Vena Cava and Ar­teria Venosa.
  • E The shutter in the Anastomosis.

FIG. V.
  • A The Corpus Thymium separated from the Vessels of the Heart.
[Page]

CHAP. 9. Of the external parts of the Breast.

THe lower Ventricle, and the parts in and about it being already spoken of, the middle ventricle follows, which is called Thorax, in English the Breast, which is round about circumscribed with the Pleura; In which we will consider, First, the external parts, then the vitals themselves.

To the external parts of the Breast, belong the common coverings of the Body, of which we have spoken already; also the Pectoral Muscle, the Serratus Anticus both greater and lesser, and of Bones, the Claviculae and Scapulae.

The Pectoral Muscle is so called, because it is spread abroad the Breast and much encreaseth its bigness; its original is from the middle Clavicula, the Sternum, the Cartilages of the sixt, seventh, and eight Ribs, it hath a short, yet strong Tendon inserted into the Bone of the Shoulder be­tween the Muscles Deltois and Biceps, and holds it stoutly to the Breast.

The Muscle called the greater Serratus anticus, ariseth obliquely to the Basis of the Scapula, from eight Ribs, five of the true ones, and three of the Bastard ones, and draws it down forwards. The lesser Serratus anti­cus, lies hid under the Pectoral, and proceeds from the second, third, fourth and fift Ribs, and passeth to the process of the Scapula, called Ancy­rois, or Beak-like, which moves the Scapula obliquely forwards; of the Clavicula and Scapula because they belong especially to the Shoulder, shall be treated of in the seventeenth Chapter.

And yet properly to the Thorax belong the Breasts, the Bones the Breast is composed of, the intercostal Muscles, the Pleura, the Mediastinum, and the Diaphragma.

The office of the Breasts in Women is to breed Milk, if you consider them in Women that give suck; they consist of very many small glan­dulous Bodies, diverse in bigness, that they may not only receive the Blood from the small Vessels, but also the vapors and milky moisture, which is largely distributed to them from the Stomach and Sweet-bread: by instinct of Nature, these small Bodies are contained together with a Membrane with diverse cavities which contain milk, the foundation of which remain when the milk is gone; they have much fat, which serves not only to ad comliness to them, but also to conserve vital heat in them.

They receive two veins, one derived from the axilliar branch w ch is di­stributed by the external part of the Breast; the other is called Mammaria and is distributed by the internal part from the subclavian branch of the Vena Cava: they have also so many Arteries as veins arising from the same roots, namely from the Subclavian branch of the great Arterie, and the axilliar, which are distributed in the same manner to give them vital heat; they have Nerves from the fourth Branch of the Marrow of the Back.

In the middest of the Breasts are the Nepples, round and rare, ende­wed with a Membrane from the glandulous Bodies; they have a thin skin full of holes, and stick out, that the Child may the better suck; round about them is a red circle like a Halo.

The bigness of the Breasts is varied, not only by years and their per­forming their office, but also by the humors that flow thither, and the diversity of the climate: In the Women in Europe, they are more con­tracted, but in the Arabian and Indian Women they are so long that they can give their Children suck over their shoulders: They are in number two, that so the woman may give two children suck; in temperament they are hot and moist, and are placed in the middest of the Breast, that so they may be the neerer to the Fountain of Vital Heat, and the readier to give the Child suck as the Mother carries it in her arms.

Their proper action is the Generation of Milk, although it be not yet very cleer by what waies it is done, because in Carkasses the passages are hid; as the passage of Chyle is in the Mesenterium, and of Seed from the Testicles to the Parastatae, and from the Prostatae to the Ʋrethra, and o­ther like passages in living Creatures, and yet the Dissection of living Creatures that give suck, gives some light to it.

For Bones, The Breast is defended with the Sternum before, on the sides with the Ribs, and behind with the Vertebrae of the Back; the sub­stance of the Bones of the Sternum is spongy and red, usually divided in­to three parts, although in age it grow into one Fone; the first and largest of them, resembles the knob of a Cup, the other two are joyned to them by Cartilages; it hath a Cartilaginous apendix, which by reason of its form is called Mucronata; it is the defence of the Diaphragma, and [Page 37] sometimes gives passage to the Mammary Vein and Artery; this also in old age grows Bony, sometimes it stick inwards and sometims outwards, and that no small prejudice to the Stomach; sometimes it sticks out to­wards the Navil as long as ones finger, and is stiff, and then it wonderfully hinders both the distribution of the Chyle by compressing the Pylorus, and also the bowing of the Body forwards.

The Ribs are partly Bony as on the Back and Sides, partly Cartiagi­nous as on the fore part where they are joyned to the Sternum; the one encreaseth the strength, the other makes the motion of the Breast the easier, and the Breast it self the safer from external injuries; they are in number on each side twelve, of which, the seven superior are cal­led True, the other inferior, Basterd Ribs, not because they are shorter but because they end not in the Sternum with Cartilages, for indeed no­thing in our Bodies is spurious or false, but all formed by the hand of Al­mighty God.

They have a hollowness in the inferior part through which they give safe passage to the Veins, Arteries, and intercostal Nerves; all the Ribs are bowed in a circular form, that so they may give convenient large­ness to the Breast; externally they are somewhat uneven, but internal­ly where they are joyned to the Pleura they are very smooth, on the Back they are received by the holes of the Vertebrae, some of them have a single, some a double knob; they are bound together with firm Li­gaments, and are joyned to the Sternum before by Cartilages, and also they stick too on another, yet is not their nexure so firm, but external in­juries often looseth it, and in the Dropsie Ascites the water often dis­joyn the Cartilages of the inferior Ribs.

As many Ribs as there are, so many Vertebrae are there to receive them, and twelve pair of Nerves from the Marrow of the Back proceed from them, the formation of Vertebrae is the same with those of the Loyns, save only the Bones are more depressed.

The Muscles of the Breast which cause the motion of it, are, the Subclavia, the triangular Muscle, the Intercostals, and the Dorsals; of the Subclavian Muscles is but one pair only, taking its beginning from the inferior part of the Clavicula, from whence it passeth to the first Rib and its superiour part, which it moveth upwards and out­wards.

The Triangular Muscles are produced from the internal part of the Sternum, and stick to the Cartilages of the superiour Ribs, which whilst they contract, the Heart also moving it self by their softness, they keep it from being hurt by the Sternum. The Intercostal Muscles on both sides, are noted to be twenty two pair, of which, eleven are external, and as many internal, distinguishing themselves by the obliquity of their strings: The external Muscles proceed from the inferior part of the su­perior Ribs, and end in the superior part of the inferior Rib, and there­fore by drawing the Ribs, they further inspiration: The internal inter­costal Muscle proceed from the superior part of the inferior Rib, and end in the inferior part of the superior, and by withdrawing the Ribs help the expiration; they receive veins from the Vein without a fellow, and [Page 38] the superior intercostal, Arteries from the superior and inferior inter­costals, Nerves from the Marrow of the back, from the eleven pair on each side, to which the internal branches of the sixt pair joyn them­selves.

As for the Dorsal Muscles, though they pertain to the Breast, yet are they better found out by dissection when the Carkass is turned over up­on its Belly, therefore we shal speak of them in the following Chapter, yet to the containing parts of the Breast are to the referred: The Pleura, Mediastinum, and Diaphragma.

The Pleura is a Membrane girding the ribs, and their Museles and in­compassing all the internal parts of the Breast: It hath Veins, Arteries, and Nerves, from the intercostal branches, and about the Vertebrae of the back it is manifestly double, it is strong every where, smooth next the Lungues, and firmly knit to the joynts of the back. The plenty of vessels often causeth an inflamation in it, and corruption is often gathe­red there, and remains sometimes between the sides of the Pleura, sometimes neer the Lungues, and sometimes in the Cavity of the Breast, the Lungues being safe.

The Mediastinum, although it may be reckoned amongst the internal parts of the Breast, yet seeing it appears to be only a continuation of the Pleura, we will describe them together. It is a double Membrane stretched from the Vertebrae of the Breast to the Sternum, and distinguish­eth both Breast and Lungues, to the right and left part, bearing up both the Heart and Pericardium: It hath a proper Vein of its own, which is called Mediastina, which ariseth from the subclavian branch of the Ve­na Cava, and it hath other smal branches from the Mammaries and Vein without a Mate; it hath Arteries from the Mammaries, and Nerves from the sixt pair, especially from its left recurrent branch.

The Largeness of the Mediastinum equals the longitude and depth of the Breast, its duplication under the Sternum, is evident, with an ob­servable interval bteween, in which sometimes a conflux of vicious hu­mors, and sometimes wind is gathered, and in deep Wounds, when the vitals themselves are not hurt, they admit of a speedy and easie cure: It is indifferent firm in respect of strength, and soft towards the Lungues, and sometimes hath fat on it.

The Diaphragma follow, otherwise called Septum Transversum, which is placed between the Breast and the Abdomen, and gives bounds to both Cavities, and concurs with the external costal Muscles to help inspira­tion; It is framed of a double substance, for it hath a Musculous flesh and a double Membrane, the superior of which it hath from the Pleura, and the inferior from the Peritonaeum, and by their concourse they fill up that part of it which wanteth flesh; it hath Veins and Arteries from the Vena Cava and great Artery, which are joyned to it; It hath famous Nerves above from the plexure of the Nerves of the Neck, from the greater descending branch of the fifth pair, and this causeth the con­sent between the Diaphragma, and the Head and Muscles of the Lips.

On the right side the Vena Cava, and on the left side the Gula passeth through the Diaphragma: It is stretched out, first of all into two fleshy; [Page] [Page 39] Secondly, into two tendinous processes, by which the great Artery de­scends, the rest of its form is almost circular, joyned to the Vertebrae of the Loyns, and the bastard ribs: In the middle where it hath a Ner­vous centre, it is firmly joyned to the Pericardium, and sometimes it knits to it self the lobes of the Lungues which lye upon it, sometimes it hath Aposthumes in it, as big as ones fist, which by reason of their weight cause a most extream Difficulty of breathing.

Place here the Table of the ninth Chapter, which hath the Number 10. at the corner of the brass Plate.

[Page]
A DECLARATION OF THE TABLE OF THE NINTH CHAPTER.

This Table represents the Muscles and bones of the Breast, its Membranes and Diaphragma.

FIG. I.
  • A The Pectoral Muscle in his scituation.
  • B The same Muscle out of his scituation.
  • C Serratus major anticus in its scituation.
  • D The same a little removed out of it.
  • E Serratus anticus minor totally in its scitua­tion.
  • F The subclavian Muscle in its scituation.
  • f The Clavicula bowed back under the pectoral Muscle.
  • gg Platysma myodes in the neck with their right strings.
  • GG &c. The external intercostal muscles without their scituation.
  • HH &c. The internal intercostal muscles in their sci­tuation.
  • II A portion of the Diaphragma in its scitua­tion.
  • K Part of the great artery descending.
  • L The hole for the Gula passing the Diaphrag­ma.
  • M The hole for the Vena Cava descending.
  • NN The square muscles of the loyns in their sci­tuation, of which Chap. 12.
  • OO The muscles called Psoas in their scituation, of which Chap. 19.

FIG. II. Shews the bones of the breast as they are to be seen forwards.
  • AA The Sternum.
  • B The Mucronata, or sword-like Cartilage.
  • CC &c. The cartilaginous part of the Ribs.
  • 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. The true Ribs.
  • 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. The bastard Ribs.

FIG. III. Shews the Ribs, Vertebrae and processes on the back part.
  •  

FIG. IV. The Breast opened, in which
  • AA The Mediastinum drawn to the side.
  • BB The tunicle of the Mediastinum diducted un­der the Sternum.
  • C The right lobe of the Lungues.

FIG. V.
  • AA Part of the Pleura drawn at one side from the Ribs.
  • BB The Ribs laid bare from the Pleura.
  • CC The Ribs cloathed with the Pleura.

FIG. VI. Shews the Diaphragma separated from the Ribs and Vertebrae.
  • AAA The fleshy part of the Diaphragma covered with its Membrane.
  • BB The Phrenical arteries.
  • CC The Phrenical veins.
  • D The passage of the Vena Cava.
  • E The passage of the Gula.
  • FFF The membranous part of the Diaphragma.
  • G The hole between the fleshy portions of the des­cending of the great artery.

FIG. VII.
  • A The left nerve of the Diaphragma.
  • B The right nerve of the same.
  • C The superior membrane of the Diaphragma separated.
  • D The fleshy substance of the Diaphragma.
  • E The hole for the Gula.
  • F The hole for the Vena Cava.
  • GGG The Membranous part.
  • HHH The fleshy parts between with the great arte­ry descends.
[Page]

CHAP. 10. Of the Heart and Lungues.

THE Heart and Lungues occupy the Cavity of the Breast, al­though the Oesophagus, Wind-pipe, and common vessels, have also their proper places in it.

Before we can behold the Heart, we must remove the Pericardium by which the Heart is wrapped round: It is of a Membranous substance, and not only contains the Heart in its proper place, but also defends it from injuries, neither is this Tunicle single, but is observed to be out­wardly the same with the Mediastinum, inwardly to proceed from the vessels produced from the Heart: It hath smal Veins from the Phrenical, its Arteries are are scarce conspicuous: It hath Nerves from the exter­nal, and internal branch of the sixt pair, and its Recurrens; although the right branch of those Nerves which are carried to the Diaphragma, passe by the out side of it, it is very neer the Heart, only there is that In­terval between the Heart and it, which is commodious for the mo­tion, and pulsation of the Heart; about the Basis of the Heart where it is joyned to the Mediastinum, it gives passage to the Veins and Arteries; It contains in it a thin Liquor, gathered of resolved vapors, whereby the driness, and suddain heaviness of the Heart is allaied.

The Heart it self, which is the Prince of all the Bowels, and the [Page 40] Fountain of vital heat and Spirit, by whose flourishing the Creature flourisheth, and by whose languishing it languisheth, and by whose fai­ling it dies. I call it the Fountain not of that primoginial heat produ­ced by the substance of the Seed, but of the influential heat; which is taken from nourishment, or drawn by Blood; It consists of a thick and compact substance, that it may not only keep that hot and vital Spirit to its self, but also communicate to the whole Body by the Arteries: It hath a proper Membrane of its own, which is very thin, and yet very strong.

The coronal Vein and Artery are distributed about the exterior part of it, the Vein from the Vena Cava, which by a Moon-like shutter stops the Blood running back; the Artery from the great Artery, which gives his branches most especially to the left side of the Heart, it hath Nerves from the next branches of the sixt pair, which are distributed to the fleshy substance of the Heart, and are scarce observable to any, of those which come to the Pericardium we have spoken before, of which, that which proceeds from the left Recurrens gives a branch to the Basis of the Heart, neither can the Heart want these, for its motion sake, be­cause it moves before the animal faculty gives either Sence or motion: It hath very many Spermatical parts, according to the recess of its Cavi­ties, like Nerves in form, but larger, and if you dilligently view them in a Dissection, you shall find they have a pore within. The greater part of the Heart is covered with fat, which preserves it from consuming, which sometimes is so copious, that the blind South-sayers that judged by the entrails of beasts, said they had no Hearts, because they could not see them for fat.

There hang appendices neer the Basis of the Heart, on each side, and by reason of their likeness they call Eears, and their substance is almost like; Save only that the left is a little more solid, they are both of them hollow, and full of Nervous strings; yet the Heart being contra­cted Systole, it may receive the Blood flowing into it, and return it back again; the bigness of the Heart in Man is famous, though various ac­cording to age and Temperament.

It is divided into the Basis, or broadest part, and the top; which is the narrowest, and ends in a poynt: It hath two Ventricles, the right, and the left, the right is the thinner, but the larger, distinguished by a thin and fleshy portition, which sometimes being doubled, makes a third.

From the right Ventricle, the Vena Cava takes its original, whose beginning is strong, being Membranous with shutters at the end, that it may administer Blood to the Heart to perfect. I call it a vessel, be­cause it contains a liquid substance, to be distributed to all the parts of the Body, and a Membranous vessel, on it consists of its own proper Tunicle, which is single and soft, that it may the better draw the blood by inosculations, and yet for safeguard in its progresse, where it lies more open; it is covered with the covering of the adjacent parts.

Also the Provident Creator hath added shutters to it, to wit, very [Page 41] thin Membranes, in form like a half Moon, which looks towards the beginnings of the Veins, which set a moderation to the preternatural motion of the Blood, out of the great Veins into the less; these al­though they may be seen in the Mesenterick, Splenical emulgent Azy­gus, and jugular Veins, yet are they more freequent in the Veins of the Limbs, which we shall treat of in the last Chapter; from these the three shutters about the mouth of the Vena Cava, differ a little in form, and from their form Authors call them Tricuspides; these are joyned to the Nervous strings of the Heart, and withstand the regresse of the Blood into the Vena Cava.

The Vena Cava arising up above the Heart produceth the Azygus, or Vein without a fellow, the branches of which, are commonly distri­buted to the inferior Ribs; the inferior portion of this, descending neer the fleshy portion of the Diaphragma, is inserted again on the left to the Emulgent, on the right side to the Vena Cava, and to the first of the Loyns, the Institution of Nature being various herein, which some­times the Azygus being let passe, produceth a famous Vein from both Subclavian branches of the Vena Cava, neer the Mammaries, which is stretched out all along the Breast, even to the Os Sacrum, from which both all the intercostal Veins, and the Lumbals proceed: when the Ve­na Cava arives at the Throat, it is divided into two large branches, cal­led Subclavian, from which the superior intercostal, the internal Mam­mary, the Mediastina, the cervical, and Vein called Muscula arise; above, the interior and exterior jugular, and the superior Muscula are produ­ced.

Also from the right Ventricle of the Heart ariseth a vein, which for its double Tunicle is called Arteriosa, which being distributed both to the right, and left part of the Lungues, by great branches administers Blood freely to them; about the bnginning of it are three Membranous shutters, very conspicuous, looking outwards, called Sigmoides from their form, they shut in the Blood which flows back from the compres­sure of the Lungues, but is indeed an Artery, not a Vein, for besides the substance of an Artery which it hath, it hath also pulsation as well as the rest of the Arteries, as the Dissection of Creatures alive shews, and it carries Blood already attenuated by the Heart.

The left Ventricle of the Heart, is smaller than the right, but more fleshy, whereby it stirs up the Spirit in the received Blood, both by its self, and by its stronger motion, and this is called vital.

The great Artery called Aorta, takes its beginning from this; a Mem­branous vessel in continual pulsation while life remains, of a shining co­lour, and distributes the Blood being absolutely perfected in the Heart, to the whole Body: Its substance is more Nervous than a vein, and co­vered with a double Tunicle, of which, the internal is the thicker, and is sometimes stiffe in old age, so that in, and neer the Heart it repre­sents a Bony circle; the external is thin, to which the Membranes of the adjoyning parts ad strength.

At its beginning are three shutters conspicuous, and are called Lunar from their Figure, and keep the Blood from returning back again into [Page 42] the Heart, neither is there any other shutters in all its Progress, for the strength of the internal tunicle doth not easily suffer dilation; and be­sides, there is no delay in the passage of blood in it: Its blood is hotter, fuller of spirits, and of a brighter colour, and seeing the distribution of it by pulse is continual, the heart must needs be continually supplied by the Vena Cava to fill its Ventricles, and this causeth a perpetual motion of Blood to the Heart, more or less; for the very same end Nature hath placed the veins as companions to the arteries, that they might readily receive what might be administred to the emptying of the Heart, for the exact knowledg of which our age is beholding to William Harvey.

The descending Trunk of the great Artery as it distributes the infe­rior intercostal Arteries, the Phrenical and others which we discoursed of when we treated of the Abdomen; so passing out of the Heart it is di­vided into two large subclavian branches, from which, before they pass out of the Breast, ariseth below, the superior intercostal Artery, and a little higher the interior Mammary, the Vertebral and Cervical; the re­mainder of the great Artery produceth the Carotides on both sides, the internal and external branch of which rise up to the head.

Neer to those Vessels about the Throat are the Thymus, a soft and spon­gy piece of flesh, which underproppeth them for their safe-guard.

From the left Ventricle of the Heart, proceeds an Artery which the Ancients call Venosa because it hath but one Tunicle and dividing its bran­ches, it is carried to the right and left region of the Lungues, taking the Blood mixed with Air to its self, and carrying it to the left Ventricle of the Heart. It hath two shutters to stay the blood from flowing back from the Heart into it, which Authors call Mitrae because they are like a Cardinals Cap; but this vessel is rather to be called a Vein than an Arte­ry, because its substance is the same with the Veins, neither hath it pulse as Arteries have, it carries the Blood tempered with Air to the Heart.

Between the Ventricles of the Heart is a partition called Septum, which is hollowish toward the left side, but gibbous towards the right, ha­ving very many small holes; many passages come to this same Septum, of a various bigness from the Vena Cava and the Arteria Venosa, which cloath the Basis of the Ventricles, and administer necessary Blood unto them.

In temperature the Heart is without doubt the hottest of all the Bo­wels; its Basis is in the middest of the Breast, only the top of it in­clines towards the left side as it moves; it is joyned to the next parts by its Vessels, and by the Pericardium to the Mediastinum and Dia­phragma.

Its proper action is to perfect the Blood, and to give it heat and vi­tal spirit, and motion which is called Pulse; this is distinguished into Sy­stole, when the Heart drawing its self together expels the Blood, and Dia­stole when it extends its self to receive it.

According to the opinion of the Ancients, only the Heart consumes not in lasting diseases, and yet it often happens that it doth pine by rea­son of hot distempers; sometimes a glandulous substance makes its [Page] [Page 43] passages straight, and sometimes they are filled with Flegm, whereby the sick loseth his life leisurely and by degrees.

On both sides of the Heart are the Lungues, which are dissimilar parts of the middle Ventricle and by drawing in the cold air, and retur­ning back the fuliginous vapors they cool the vital heat, therefore that they may every where be filled and distended, they are composed of a soft substance rare and subtil, and covered with a porous Membrane; they receive very large vessels, the Arterial vein from the right, and the Venal artery from the left Ventricle of the Heart: also the wind-pipe which we shall discourse of in the next Chapter, it hath small Nerves from the external descending branch of the sixt pair, but dis­persed about the exterior Tunicle, and the hinder parts of it, where they are joyned to the branches of the Wind-pipe, not only for their safety, but also for the means of its sence, that it may not be troublesom to their motion.

The Lungues being swelled by inspiration of air, fill the Breast univer­sally, and the Mediastinum being between they are divided into the right and left part, both which for the more safeguard is divided into the su­perior and inferior lobe; outwardly, the Lobes resemble an Ox hoof; inwardly they are hollowish, and gently imbrace the Heart, and there­fore often communicate their vices to it, although if putrified matter lie in the gibbous part without any evident rottenness, or feaverish bur­ning; the strength of the Heart and the vigor of the Natural functions remains long untouched.

They are judged to be in temperature hot and dry, by reason of the plenty of spirits, and scarcity of nourishment although the moisture that alwaies flow to them and the frequent access of cold Air seems to ob­scure both, they are thicker in Children, and grow rare by degrees, and also change colour, for in old age they are limber and whitish, they are joyned to the Neck by the Wind-pipe to the back and Sternum by the Mediastinum to the Pleura and Mediastinum by the skin that compasseth them sometimes, and sometimes by some fibrous nexures. The action of the Lungues is respiration, which they are moved to by the copious flowing of hot blood to them, by the Arterious vein; the same is done by the Muscles, breast and Lungues dilating and contracting themselves in the Breast.

Place here the Table of the tenth Chapter, which hath the Number 11. at the corner of the brass Plate.

[Page]
A DECLARATION OF THE FIRST TABLE OF THE TENTH CHAPTER.

This Table chiefly represents the Heart, its Membranes, Vessels, Ventricles and shutters, then the Lungues and the Aspera Arteria separated from them.

FIG. I.
  • A The Pericardium compassing the Heart.
  • BB The Lungues embracing the Heart in their Na­tural Scituation.
  • C The Vena Cava ascending above the Heart.
  • D The beginning of the vein without a fellow.
  • E The right subclavian vein.
  • F The right Jugular vein.
  • G The left Jugular vein.
  • H The left subclavian vein.
  • II The right and left Carotis Artery.
  • KK The right and left subclavian Artery.
  • LL The Nerves of the sixt pair descending to the Lungues.
  • M The beginning of the great Artery descending.

FIG. II. Shews particularly the vessels passing from the Heart to the Lungs; which are shewed you separated in the third and sixt figure of the following Chapter.
  • A The Pericardium taken from the Heart.
  • B The Heart with the Coronal veins and arteries.
  • C The trunk of the great Artery passing out of the Heart.
  • D Its descending part turned upwards.
  • EE The left branch of the Arterial vein distributed to the Lungues.
  • F A channel between the arterial vein, and the great artery.
  • G The right branch of the arterial vein.
  • HH The right and left branch of the venal artery.
  • I The Ear of the Heart.
  • KK The Lungues about the Heart.
  • L The proper tunicle of the Lungues separated.

FIG. ♃. The Heart of an Infant whol.
  • A The proper Membrane of the Heart separated.
  • B The substance of the Heart bare.
  • CC The right and left Ears of the Heart.
  • D The great Artery sticking out of the Heart.
  • E A portion of the Vena Cava.

FIG. ⚹
  • A Part of the Heart transversly cut.
  • B The left ventricle.
  • CC The right ventricle conspicuous.
  • DD The Septum of the Heart.

FIG. III. Shews the Vena Cava dissected with the right Ventricle.
  • A The Orifice of the coronal Vein.
  • B The Anastomosis between the Vena Cava and the venal artery.
  • CCC The shutters called Tricuspides.
  • DDD The right Ventricle of the Heart opened.
  • aa The passages between the Membranes ending in the Septum.

FIG. IV.
  • A The arterious vein dissected in the right ven­tricle.
  • BBB The shutters called Sigmoides in the arterious vein.
  • CCC The right Ventricle of the Heart opened.

FIG. V.
  • A The great Artery dissected neer the Heart.
  • BBB The semilunar shutters of the great artery.
  • CC The left Ventricle of the heart.
  • D Part of the left Ventricle turned back.

FIG. VI.
  • A The Venal artery dissected.
  • B The beginning of the Anastomosis between the venal artery and the Vena Cava.
  • bb The passages between the Membranes ending in the Septum.
  • CC The two mitral shutters.
  • DD The left Ventricle of the Heart opened.

FIG. VII. Shews the backward part of the Lungues and wind-pipe, as they are joyned to the Heart.
  • A The right Nerve of the sixt pair which comes to the Lungues.
  • B The left Nerve of the same.
  • C The middle branch between each Nerve.
  • D The branch which is carried to the Pericardium.
  • EE The two greater branches of the windpipe which are Membranous behind.
  • FF The hinder part of the Lungues.
  • G The proper Membrane of the Lungues.
  • HH A portion of the Pericardium left.
  • I The heart left in his Scituation.

FIG. VIII.
  • A The wind-pipe cut off under the Larynx.
  • B The right branch thereof divided first into two parts.
  • C The left branch thereof divided into greater and lesser branches.
  • ddd &c. The extremity of the branches ending in membranous channels.
[Page]
[Page]
A DECLARATION OF THE SECOND TA­BLE OF THE TENTH CHAPTER.

In this Table the Trunks of the Vena Cava and great Artery as they pass from the Heart are represented; with their chief branches only produced even to the Limbs.

FIG. I. Shews the Vena Cava.
  • A The beginning of the Vena Cava, with his large orifice about the Heart.
  • BB The rise of the subclavian branches.
  • C The beginning of the descending trunk.
  • DD The right and left Iliack branches.
  • aaa &c. The branches of the Axygus distributed to the Ribs.
  • bb The superior intercostal.
  • cc The internal mammary.
  • * The Mediastina.
  • dd The Vertebral Vein.
  • ee The internal Jugular cut off under the skul.
  • ff The external Jugular, from which the in­ferior branch riseth to the Organ of speech, and the Subcutaneus by the face and Tem­ples, and backwards by another branch to the Ears.
  • gg The Cervical Vein.
  • hh The progress of the subclavian branches.
  • ii The internal scapular vein.
  • KK The external scapulars.
  • 3.3. The vein carried to the Muscle Deltois.
  • ll The superior Breast-vein.
  • mm The Cephalick vein cut off.
  • nn The basilick vein cut off.
  • oo The inferior Breast-vein.
  • p The left phrenical vein.
  • q The right phrenical vein.
  • rr A famous branch distributed in the Liver.
  • ss tt &c. The sprigs thereof distributed in the right and left side thereof.
  • uu The Venae musculae, or superior Lumbals.
  • yy The veins of the Renal Glandulae.
  • xx The right and left emulgent.
  • zz The right and left spermatical.
  • αα The beginning of the Lumbals.
  • ββ The Vena muscula of the inferior Lumbal.
  • γγ The Vena sacra.
  • ΔΔ The external Iliack branch.
  • ΕΕ The Epigastrick vein.
  • δδ The internal Iliack branch.
  • εε Vena Glutea.
  • ζζ The Hypogastrick veins.
  • ηη The veins of the Privities.
  • θθ The inguinal veins.
  • ΚΚ &c. The branch of the crural vein.
  • iii The Saphena.
  • λλ The vein Ischias.

FIG. II. Particularly describes the coronal vein of the heart.
  •  

FIG. III. Shew the Arterial Vein of the Heart.
  • A The beginning by which it passeth out of the right ventricle.
  • BB Its branches which pass to the right part of the Lungues.
  • CC Its branches which pass to the left.

FIG. IV. Shews the great Artery.
  • A Its beginning rising out of the heart.
  • BB The beginning and progress of the subclavian branches.
  • C The trunk descending.
  • DD The right and left Iliack branches.
  • aa The artery Carotis.
  • bb Its external branch distributed to the Jaws, Face, and backwards to the Ears.
  • cc The internal Carotis cut off under the skull.
  • dd The vertebral artery in like manner cut off.
  • δδ The cervical muscula.
  • ee The internal Mammary.
  • ff The branches of the superior intercostal artery.
  • gg The internal scapular artery.
  • hh The external scapular artery.
  • ii The superior breast-artery.
  • kk The inferior breast-artery.
  • lm The arteries distributed to the muscles of the Shoulder.
  • nn The inferior intercostals.
  • oo The phrenical arteries.
  • p The famous artery called Coeliac [...].
  • q Its right branch divided into three parts; of which, the superior and inferior is distributed to the Liver, and the middle to the Gall.
  • r The left branch of the Coeliacal.
  • s The right Gastrical artery.
  • t The splenical artery divided in smal branches to the spleen.
  • u The artery called Epiploica.
  • ur The Gastroepiploica.
  • x The artery carried to the Renal Glandula.
  • yyy &c. The superior Mesenterical artery distributed into branches.
  • zz The emulgent arteries.
  • αα The rise of the Lumbal arteries.
  • ββ The spermatical arteries.
  • γγ The inferior Mesenterical artery derived into many branches.
  • ♁ The Arteria sacra.
  • ΔΔ The external Iliack artery.
  • δδ The internal Iliack.
  • ηη Arteria Glutaea.
  • ζζ The Hypogastrick artery distributed to the right Gut and Privities.
  • ♀♀ The Hypogastrick artery distributed to the womb distinguished from the former.
  • εε The umbilicar artery.
  • ΕΕ The Epigastrick artery.
  • θθ The Arteria Pudenda.
  • ii The Ischias.
  • kk The inferior Arteria Muscula.
  • λλ The artery which goes to the internal Iliack muscle.

FIG. V. Shews the Coronal Artery of the Heart.
  •  

FIG. VI. Shews the Venal Artery arising from the left Ventricle of the Heart.
  • A Its Orifice.
  • BB Its branches distributed to the right side of the Lungues.
  • CC Its branches distributed to the left.
[Page]

CHAP. II. Of the Organs of Voyce and Speech.

THE Wind-pipe called Trachaea and Aspera Arteria conduceth much to the perfecting of the Office of the Lungues, being the channel by which we draw air by inspiration, and by expiration cast out fuliginous vapors, and form voice and speech: Its substance is partly Cartilaginous, that the voyce might be the easier, by reason of the dri­ness of the Organ, and partly Membranous where it is joyned to the Oesophagus, that the dilation of it might not be hindred by lying upon a hard body. The Cartilaginous part is not all one, but composed of ve­ry many rings, of which the superior are the greater; those which are next the Gula, want the inferior part of their circumference, the rest remain whol till after they have entred the substance of the Lungues, they are all curiously knit together, by a fleshy Ligament, at last they end in Membranous channels like Arteries.

The Wind-pipe is covered with a double Membrane, one external which they hold it hath from the Pleura, which is thin and firmly bound to the Ligaments of the Cartilages, the internal is thicker and common to the pallat of the mouth, of exquisite sence, and ready to cast out what troubles it, it is bedewed with a fatty humor, that the sound may be the cleerer, for being rough with flegm, the voice is hoarce, if dried with heat, it is not steady, [ Clangosus is when the voyce begins grave, and ends acute.]

It hath veins from the external Jugular, Arteries from the Cartides, Nerves from the external branches of the sixt pair, & its Recurrens: Sex & difference of Temperament alters the bigness of the wind-pipe; in form it is like a small shrub that hath crooked branches every way, neither is it joyned to the Lungues only, but also to the Oesophagus, and by its head to the Os Hyois.

It is divided into two parts, Bronchus and Larinx, that which is called Bronchus is the lower part, long, and divided into many branches in both sides of the Lungues: The Larynx is the superior part or head of it, for­med of Cartilages and Muscles, for the forming and expressing of sounds.

Its Cartilages are five, whereof the first is called Thyroides or buckler-like, from its form, being hollow within and gibbous without, which is that which sticketh out in the Throat of some men: Its processes are four, of which, two which are superiour, and the longer are joyned be­low to the sides of the Os Hyois; the other two which are the inferior and shorter, are joyned to the ring-like Cartilage.

The Buckler-like Cartilage is moved by three pair of Muscles, of which, [Page 45] the first which draws the Cartilage downward, proceeds from the su­perior and internal part of the Sternum, and is inserted into the inferior side of the Cartilage, it is called Sternothryroides by the An­cient.

The second pair which are very small, move the Cartilage in the same manner, but something obliquely; they take their origional forewards from the Ring-like Cartilage, and end in the inferior side of the Buck­ler-like Cartilage, from whence they obtained the name Crycothyroides, though sometimes on the sides they are largely divided into two Mus­cles; by both these pairs the chink of the Larynx is not a little dilated: to draw the buckler-like Cartilage upwards, and bind together the chink of the Larynx, is the third pair ordained, which ariseth from the inferi­or side of the Hyois, and ends about the inferior part of the Bucker-like Cartilage, and is called Hyotnyroides.

The second Cartilage is called Cricoides, or ring-like, because before 'tis round, behind hath a broad back, just like the Ring the Turkish Archers use to fight in (I doubt my Author was mistaken, it was the Parthian horse-men, not the Turks, that used to fight in Rings.)

The third and fourth Cartilages, are called Arytaenoides, because their form makes a lip like a Laver, and they represent that part of the La­rynx which is called Glottis.

Both of them for the better framing of the voyce, are moved with four pair of Muscles; of which, the first are called Thyroarytaenoides: It ariseth from the middle internal part of the Thyrois, or buckler-like Cartilage, it is fleshy, and raised upwards and forwards, into the sides of the Arytaenois, and binds in the chink of the Larynx. The second pair are called Arytenoides, they are very small, yet fleshy, and arise from the Arytenois, in what part it is joyned to the Ring-like Cartilage, it ends in the Arytenois; the extremities of them so meeting together, that they seem to be but one Muscle; by this pair whilst the Basis of the Arytenois, is obliquely moved, and drawn together, the chink also of the Larynx is shut. The third pair is called Cricoarytenoides posticum, for they arise from the Cricois, or Ring-like Cartilage, from its broad back, and are inserted below into the Aritaenois, by a short and Nervous tendon, which whilst they move backwards, and outwards, they open the passage of the Larynx. The fourth pair is called Cricoarytaenoides La­teralis, because they arise from the back side of the Ring-like Cartilage, and end in the Arytaenois, and dilate the passage of the Larynx.

The fifth Cartilage is called Epiglottis, or that which covers the Chink, least the meat and drink should passe down the Wind-pipe, and yet it shuts not so close, but thin humors which passe down gently may passe that way: It is softer than the rest of the Cartilages, and in form is like an Ivy leafe; the larger the Larynx is, the larger is the Glottis, and as that is larger, so the Voyce is stronge and graver: The lesser, dryer, and narrower the Larynx is, the weaker, and shriller is the Voyce.

The Os Hyoides, called also Ypsiloides, is placed about the Basis of the Tongue, both for its safeguard, and also for its motion, it consists of three Bones, which being joyned together, represent the form [Page 46] of the Greek letter Ʋpsilon, of these the middlemost is largest, broad, and something hollow, to which the other are joyned like Horn; many Cartilaginous appendices are joyned to these, which sometimes also grow Bony, of which two are very freequent, in form and bigness like a grain of Wheat, and placed about the middle Bone, which is called the Basis of the Hyois; two others stick to the lateral Bones, which are called Horns, and are knit to that Nervous Ligament of the Bodkin-like apendix, in what form they are often seen in the Body of Man, the eleventh and twelth Figure of the following Table will declare.

The Os Hyois, is removed by five pair of Muscles, of these that which moveth it down right ariseth, from the top of the Sternum, and ascends to the Basis of the Hyois, and is called Sterno Hyoides; another pair moves it obliquely downwards, which ariseth from the superior side of the Scapula, besides the processe called Coracois, and consisting of a Ner­vous Body, is carried to the sides of the Os Hyois, and is called Coraco Hyoides: The third pair, which draws it obliquely upwards, ariseth from the extremity of the Bodkin-like apendix, with a round Body, and is stretched to the Horns of the Hyois, and is called Stylocerato Hyoides: The fourth pair which draws it directly upwards, ariseth from the in­ternal, and lower part of the Chin, and passeth to the Bones of the Hy­ois, and is called Geniohyoides; to these we add a fift pair, which are com­monly attributed to the tongue, and are called Genioglossum, which a­rise inwardly from the Chin, under the former, and end in the Basis of the Hyois, drawing it upwards; although in respect of the former, they might more rightly be called the internal Geniohyoides. The Os Hyois, is joyned to the Bodkin-like apendix, and to the Buckler-like Cartilage; especially to the Tongue, for the reasons mentioned before, and re­ceives the Epiglottis in its Cavity.

Also the Tongue is the framer of Speech, and a great help to the swallowing of the Meat, and preparing it for the Stomach: It is of a fleshy substance, soft, and rare, covered with a thin Skin, and full of pores; It hath two veins from the external Jugulars, which are called R [...]ninae, and as many Arteries from the Carotides; It hath two pair of Nerves, of which, the smallest comes from the fourth conjugalation, and is carried to the exterior part of the Tongue; but the greater which goes to the interior part of it, comes from the seventh conjugalati­on.

The Tongue is moved both by the Muscles of the Hyois, and also by its own proper Muscles, which are four pair; the first which is genuin to the Tongue, lifts it up, and ariseth from the Bodkin-like apendix, and is inserted about the middle of it, and called Styloglossus; another pair ariseth from the Basis of the Os Hyois, and depresseth the Tongue, this also ends about the middle of the Tongue, and is called Basioglossus: The third pair moves the Tongue to the Sides, and arise from the Horns of the Hyois, and is joyned to the sides of the Tongue, and for that cause called Ceratoglossus; to these are added a fourth pair of Muscles, arising from the hinder grinders, and are called Myloglossus, this is not immediatly inserted into the Tongue, but into its Ligament, and is sup­posed to turn the Tongue upward.

The Tongue of man hath a mean habit divided upon a Line along the length of it: In respect of the harmony of manifest quallities it is temperate: If it be colder or moister, it is by accident; It is joyned to the parts under it by a strong and Membranous Ligament, the extremi­ty of which makes a bridle, the rest of it is joyned to the Os Hyois, and Larinx.

At the root of the Tongue are two Glandula, which the Greeks call Antiades, and Paristhmia, but the Latins Tonsillae; a fleshy and loose substance compasseth them about from the pallat, which as it recei­veth them in its Cavity, so it takes a moist excrement from them: There are other Glandulae under the Chin, between the Hyois, and the Muscles of the Tongue; as also behind, which are called Parotides, the common use of them, is to receive the superfluous moisture, and to moisten the parts adjacent to them.

Neer the Epiglottis, from the extremity of the pallat, is a Pendulous, Fungous, Red piece of flesh produced, which Authors call Gargareon and Ʋvula: It is moved by two pair of Muscles, of which, the external takes its original from the top of the Wedge-like Bone, neer the joynt of the Maxilla, and passing with his tendon by the Chink of that Bone, it is inserted into the sides of the Gargareon, which moves it forwards when the Tongue is depressed, the other or internal pair, begins a little higher, from the top of the Bone of the Temples, which looks to the internal wing of the Wedge-like Bone, and descends with a fle­shy and round Body, into the middle of the Ʋvula, both of them con­duce to the easy descending of the nourishment, the pleasantness of the Voyce, and the preparation of the air which is drawn into the Breast.

Moreover the Neck is an apendix to the middle Ventricle, and is long for the better ordering the Voyce; the hinder part of which, is called Cervix, it hath both the common coverings of the Body, and vessels, as Veins, Arteries, and Nerves; also Vertebrae, and Muscles of its own.

Its Vertebrae are seven, of which the Spinae Bifidae, and the transverse processes have holes through them for the Ascending of the Vertebral Artery: The first is called Atlas, thin in substance, and without a Spi­na, which holds up the Head, like the Olympus of the Body, to which it is knit with a strong Ligament; It is larger in Lyons, and the like beasts of prey, and hath transverse processes like wings, which adds not only strength, but also some stiffeness to the Neck, which the An­cients falsly attributed to the several Bones: In the Cavity of this the second Vertebrae is received, which for its turning, is called Epistropheus, it sends out a round processe, and long like a Tooth, from whence Hippocrates gave it the name Vertebrae, the head and first Vertebrae are turned about this, it is both knit to the hinder part of the Head, and compassed about with a strong Ligament: The third is called Axon by the Ancients, the rest have no distinct names.

The Neck is moved by four pair of Muscles, of which, two bow it, and the other extend it; the first that bows it, is called Longus, which [Page 48] arising under the Oesophagus from the fifth Vertebrae of the Breast is knit to the first Vertebrae of the Neck; to this long Muscle is a short one adjoyned for its shortness called Brevius, arising from the transverse processes of the inferior Vertebrae of the Neck to the Basis of the Head, and therefore to­gether with the pair called Mastois, bows not the Neck, but the Head. The second pair for its form sake is called Scalenum, which ariseth from the first Rib of the Breast, with a broad and fleshy beginning, and gro­wing slenderer by degrees, passeth by its oblique fibrae to the transverse processes of the Vertebrae of the Neck: the third and fourth pair we shall describe in the following Chapter amongst those Muscles that extend the Head.

Place here the Table of the eleventh Chapter, which hath the Number 13. at the corner of the brass Plate.

[Page]
AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF THE ELEVENTH CHAPTER.

In this Table is laid open to view, the Cartilages of the Larynx, with their Muscles; the Os Hyois with its Muscles; the Tongue, its Nerves and Muscles; the Ʋvula with its Muscles; the Tonsils, the Vertebrae of the Neck and its bowing Muscles.

FIG. I. The external face of the Buckler-like Cartilage.
  •  

FIG. II. The internal face of the Buckler-like Cartilage.
  •  

FIG. III. The hinder view of the Ring-like Cartilage.
  •  

FIG. IV. A view of the foremost part of the same Cartilage.
  •  

FIG. V. VI. The Cartilages called Arytaenoides.
  •  

FIG. VII. The Epiglottis.
  •  

FIG. VIII.
  • A The Buckler-like Cartilage.
  • BB The pair of Muscles Hyothyroides.
  • CCCC The pair of Muscles Sternothyroides.
  • DD The small Muscles called Cricothiroides.

FIG. IX.
  • A The external part of the Epiglottis joyned to the Larynx.
  • BB The Muscles Thyroarytaenoides.
  • CC The lateral Muscles Cricoarytaenoides.
  • D The Ring-like Cartilage.
  • EE The fore part of the wind-pipe.

FIG. X.
  • A The internal face of the Epiglottis.
  • aa The sticking out of the cartilages Arytaenoides.
  • BB The Muscles Arytaenoides every where loosed.
  • CC The Muscles Cricoaritaenoides postici.
  • D The broad part of the Ring-like cartilage.
  • EE The hinder and membranous part of the wind-pipe.

FIG. XI.
  • A The Basis of the Os Hyois.
  • BB The horns of the Os Hyois.
  • CC The two cartilaginous Appendices.

FIG. XII.
  • A The internal face of the Basis of the Os Hyois.
  • BB The internal face of the horns.
  • CC The two cartilaginous Appendices.

FIG. XIII.
  • A The sides of the Os Hyois.
  • BB The muscles Geniohyoides turned downwards.
  • CC The internal Geniohyoides commonly called Genioglossi.
  • DDDD The muscles Sternohyoides.
  • EE The muscles Styloceratohyoides.
  • FFF The Muscles Coracohyoides.
  • ff The middle tendinous part.

FIG. XIV.
  • A The inferior part of the top of the Tongue.
  • BBBB The muscles Basioglossi.
  • ssss The nervous substance between the muscles.
  • CC The muscles Ceratoglossi.
  • DD The muscles Styloglossi.
  • EE The muscles Myloglossi.
  • aa The Nerves of the Tongue from the fourth conjugation.
  • bb The Nerves of the Tongue from the seventh conjugation.

FIG. XV.
  • A The Gargareon or Uvula.
  • BB The external pair of Muscles.
  • bb Its tendon which passeth the chink.
  • CC The internal pair of muscles something compres­sed.
  • D Part of the Pallat from which the Uvula hangs.

FIG. XVI, and XVII. Shews the Glandulae called Tonsillae.
  •  

FIG. XVIII.
  • AA The long muscles bowing the neck.
  • BB The muscles bowing the neck called Scaleni.
  • aa Part of the Nerves tending to the arms.
  • CC The muscles bowing the Head with the Ma­stoides.

FIG. XIX. Shews the seven joynts of the neck.
  •  

FIG. XX. The first joynt of the Neck, in which
  • aa The two holes holding the hinder part of the Head.
  • bb The holes on the sides which gives passage to the arteries to ascend.

FIG. XXI. The second Vertebra of the Neck.
  • a The tooth-like process.
  • b The Spina Bifidia.

FIG XXII.
  • a The Spine: the rest is like the other joynts.
[Page]

CHAP. 12. Of the Muscles of the Scapula, Back, and certain of the Head.

VEry many Muscles occupy the Back, of which some are proper to it, and some move the parts neer it.

The first in order of dissection are the two Muscles called Tra­pezii and Culcullares because being joyned together they resemble a Fryars Cool, they move the Sapula; they begin at the hinder part of the Head, and the hinder processes of the Vertebrae of the Neck, being joyned by a Membranous nexure to the eight superior Vertebrae of the Back; from hence being knit together by degrees, they end in part of the Clavicula, on the top of the shoulder, and especially in the Spina of the Scapula and the Basis of it; neither is their motion simple, their Ori­ginal having such latitude, for by reason of the diversity of their fibrae, they move the shoulder backwards as well as obliquely upwards or downwards.

Under the Trapezii is the pair of Muscles called Rhomboides, from their form, this also is peculiar to the Scapula; they take their beginning from the three inferior Vertebrae of the Neck, and as many of the spinous pro­cesses of the superior Vertebrae of the Back; afterwards descending ob­liquely with a fleshy beginning and end, they are carried to the Basis of the Scapula, which they move backwards and obliquely upwards. The Muscle called Serratus Anticus minor, moves the Scapula forwards, which we mentioned in the ninth Chapter. Lastly, the pair called Levatorium is proper to the Scapula, so called from their office; they take their be­ginning from the transverse processes of the second, third, fourth, and fifth Vertebrae of the Neck, they are stretched downwards with a fleshy and strong end, and knit to the superior angle of the Scapula, and lift both it and the shoulder up forward.

That the Muscles of the Back may be the better discried, you must first separate the broad pair of Muscles, which are called Latissimum Dorsi, although they are peculiar to the shoulder and not to the Back, their be­ginning from the posteriour processes of the Vertebrae is broad and Mem­branous; they begin from the sixt Vertebrae of the Back even to the mid­dle of the Os Sacrum, and part of the Os Ilium, from hence they pass both above and below by the sides of the Back, till they come to the inferior angle of the Scapula, being fleshy and contracted they end about the head of the Shoulder with a short and strong Tendon, which stoutly moves it backwards.

The proper Dorsal Muscles are both those called Serratus Posticus, from their tooth-like productions in form of a saw; also the Sacrolumbi, the longest of the Back, and the Semispinati. Of the Serrati Pistici, two are superior and lesser, two inferior and greater: The superiour arise with a thin and Membranous beginning from the hinder processes of the three inferior Vertebrae of the Neck, and the first Spine of the Vertebrae of the Back, afterwards being fleshy in their descention; they are carried to the three or four superior Ribs, according as they are endewed with two or three tooth-like productions: The inferior Serrati postici, arise from the Spines of the inferior Vertebrae of the Back, with a Membranous beginning, then running transversly they are knit to the intervals of the inferior Ribs, others take the beginnings of them both, from the inter­vals of the Ribs, and their ends in the Spines of the Vertebrae, and that they conduce to the turning about the Vertebrae. The original of the Muscles Sacrolumbi, is from the extremity of the Os Sacrum, their begin­ning is fleshy inwards, nervous outwards, whence arising up about the lo­wer Vertebra of the Back, they depart a little to the Ribs, from the lon­gest Muscle, into which they are inserted with various Tendons, and com­press the Ribs in expiratton. The beginning and progress of the longest Muscles of the Back is from the Os Sacrum, Os Ilium, and Vertebrae of the Loyns, and are at first united to the Sacrolumbi, and are first distinguished about the lower Vertebra of the Back, and bestow their Tendines upon the transverse processes of the Vertebrae of the Back and Loyns, and they are strong extenders of the Back, and of all those Vertebrae that have pro­cesses: The Semispinati serve also to move and extend the Back, they [Page 50] are altogether fixed in the Vertebrae and furnish them with Tendons from the top to the bottom. This is certain, these three Muscles we spake of, if we consider the conjunction of their beginnings, the one-ness of their Membranes, and the community of their office, they make but one Muscle; but if we regard the multitude of their Tendons, and variety of their endings, they seem very many.

Under the Sacrolumbi and the longest Muscles, are the two extenders of the Loyns, called Sacri; these rise externally from the Os Sacrum, and by a various progress fasten their Tendons in the Vertebrae of the Loyns and their oblique processes: The bowers of Loyns are opposed to these, called Quadrati, which arise internally from the Os Sacrum, and Ilium; they have a large and fleshy beginning, and grow slender by degrees, and joyn themselves to the transverse processes of the Vertebrae of the Loyns, bowing them.

The Muscles which are referred to the Head, some move the whol Head, others certain parts of it, of which in the Chapter following: They which move the whol Head, are called, Musculi Splenii, Complexi, Recti majores et minores which extend it; the superior and inferior oblique Muscles move it about, the Mastoides bow it: The Muscles are called Splenii from the form of their sides, they have a double beginning, partly from the five Spines of the inferior Vertebrae of the Neck, partly from so many of the superior Vertebrae of the Breast, and end in the hinder part of the Head with somewhat oblique fibrae: Complexi are so called from the distinction of parts, they arise from the four transverse processes of the superior Vertebrae of the Breast, and from the Spine of the seventh Vertebra of the Neck, and are strongly inserted into the Head from the middle part of the Dug-like prominence: Recti majores are short fleshy Muscles, arising from the Spine of the second vertebrae of the Neck, and ending about the middle of the Occiput: Recti minores are under the for­mer, arising from the bunch of the first vertebra, something divided in their progress, and end with the former.

Seeing the Head is not only to be extended, but also to be turned a­bout, this is done by small, yet very strong Muscles; of which, two are called the Superior, two the Inferior Obliques: The Superior Ob­lique arise from the transverse process of the first vertebra, and end in the hinder part of the Head neer the sides of the external right Muscles; The Inferior Oblique arise from the Spine of the second vertebra of the Neck, and end in the transverse process of the first vertebra and therefore this vertebra being moved, moves about the Head.

The Mastoides being long and thick Muscles, bow the Head; they rise partly from the top of the Sternum, partly from the Clavicula, and are car­ried with a Body almost double and Oblique, by the neck to the Dug-like process, from which they obtain their name; to these are joyned as companions the two Muscles in the Neck, which arise from the trans­verse processes of its vertebrae, and arise to the Basis of the Head, and bow it together with them.

These Muscles being removed, the extenders of the Neck remain, namely, two Tranversals, and two Spinals; The Transversals take their [Page] [Page 51] beginning from the six Transverse processes of the superior vertebrae of the Breast, and end in the Transverse processes of the vertebrae of the Neck: The Spinals arise from the seven Spines of the vertebrae of the Breast, and the five Roots of the Transverse processes of the Neck, ha­ving various beginnings, and end in the Spine of the second vertebra.

Place here the Table of the twelf Chapter, which hath the Number 14. at the corner of the brass Plate.

[Page]
THE TABLE OF THE TWELFTH CHAPTER UNFOLDED.

It contains the Muscles which are conspicuous about the Shoulders, Back, Loyns, and Neck, the Carkass being turned over upon the Belly.

FIG. I.
  • AA The muscles Trapezii in their scituation.
  • BB The Rhomboides laid a little to view.
  • CC DD The broadest muscle of the back, in which
  • CC Shews its fleshy part.
  • DD Its membranous beginning.

FIG. II.
  • AA Trapezius pulled out of its scituation.
  • BB The Rhomboides laid open in its scituation.
  • C The same drawn out of his scituation, as yet joyned to the basis of the Scapula.
  • DD Both the Levators of the Scapula.
  • E Serratus posticus minor in his scituation.
  • F Serratus posticus major in his scituation.
  • G The same muscle out of his scituation.
  • HH The greatest part of the Musculi Splenii con­spicuous in their scituation.
  • II A portion of the Musculi complexi.
  • KK The Mastoides somewhat separated above.
  • LL The Sacrolumbi not removed out of their place.
  • MM The longest muscles of the back not separated.
  • NN The beginnings of the Sacrolumbi and longest muscles united.
  • OO The muscles Quadrati somewhat laid open.

FIG. III.
  • AA The beginnings of the muscles Sacrolumbi and the longest united.
  • BBBB The Sacrolumbi something moved out of their place and distinguished in their tendons.
  • CCCC The longest muscles of the back somewhat re­moved, and distinguished into their tendons.
  • DD The Musculi Spinati not separated.
  • E The Muscle Complexus in its scituation.
  • F The same separated from the Head, that so the rest may come to view.
  • GG The Muscles extending the neck in their sci­tuation.
  • H The fore part of the Mastoides loosed.
  • I The greater right muscle of the Head, drawn a little out of his place, that so the lesser right muscle may appear.
  • K The superior oblique muscle of the Head.
  • L The inferior oblique Muscle.

FIG. IV.
  • AA &c. The Musculus Spinatus pulled out of his place, that so the tendons may be beheld in their order; they are described at the big­gest.
  • BB The muscles of the Loyns called Sacer in his place.
  • CC A porrion of the muscles Quadrati in their place.
  • DD The muscles Spinati in their place.
  • EE The transverse muscles of the neck decipho­red greater and longer than they should be, that so the tendons may be the better seen.
  • FF The Mastoides separated from the Sternum, and turned back.
  • GG The inferior oblique muscles of the Head.
  • HH The superior oblique muscles of the head.
  • II The greater right muscles of the head some­thing drawn aside.
  • KK The lesser right muscles of the head in their place.
[Page]

CHAP. 13. Of the external Parts of the Head, their Bones and Muscles.

HAving finished the lower and middle Ventricle, we come to the upper, which is the seat of those noble functions of the Soul; this is bounded with the circumference of the Head: It hath the Face before, the forepart of the Head in the middle, and the hinder part behind; the external parts are to be viewed which serve both for covering and defence, and these are either common to other parts or proper to the Head, also the brain it self and amongst the Organs of sen­ces, the Eyes and Ears.

We will begin with those that are common and external, of which, the skin upon the upper part of the Head is remarkable for its thick­ness, that so it may defend the Head the better, and give the better roo­ting to the Hair, which Nature hath placed thick for the ornament and safeguard of that part, to defend it from the cold blasts of wind, and the parching heat of the Sun; underneath the skin is fat, but very little, lest the thickness of it should hinder the transpiration of vapors; next to the fat is a fleshy Panicle in which we will shew the thin expansions of the Muscles in their proper places.

It hath Bones for its safeguard both various and strong; these are co­vered with a Membrane which is called Pericranium, which is thin, yet double and exquisite in sence, by reason of the Nerves distributed unto it, by the hinder part of the Head and the Temples: It is firmly joyned by Sutures by the Junctures of the Bones, even to the Dura mater with Nervous Fibrae, from whence there is an easie consent between both Mem­branes: The Bones of the Head are referred either to the Skull or the Cheeks; to the Skull pertain the Bones of the Fore-head, the fore and hinder part of the Head, the Temples, Sphenois, and Cribriforme.

The Bone of the Forehead is of a great bigness, 'tis usually but one, sometimes two, even in such as are grown up; it hath a double plate fil­led with substance like pumice; it hath a large passage to the Nostrils, sometimes 'tis single, sometimes it hath one or two bridges, which a Marrowy Body, compassed about with a green Membrane, guardeth, they say to prepare the air that passeth to the brain; its thickness, if you compare it with the fore and hinder part of the Head is mean, in figure it is almost circular, its passages are small, defending the angles of the Eyes on each side; it hath two holes about the Eye-brows, which give passage to the Nerves of the third Conjugation, although often times Nature doth not give perfect holes, but little trenches only for the safeguard and distribution of the said Nerves; To these a third hole is added for the crest of the Os Ethmois, which opens it self in the said hole, the Bone of the Forehead is joyned before to the Bone called Caneiforme to the Ethmois, to the ten Bones of the Cheek, above by the coronal Su­ture to the Bones of the fore part of the Head.

The Bones of the fore part of the Head are in number two, and are thinner than the rest, and in form unequally square, they have a kind of smoothness to the touch, and small holes for the Vessels neer the Suture called Sagittalis; within it is garnished with small trenches for the veins which arise up by the Dura mater; it is divided by its proper Suture which is called Sagittalis; in its circumference it is joyned to the bones of the Forehead, hinder part of the Head, and Temples.

The Bones of the Temples are also two, less than the rest in bigness, and not every where distinguished by a double Lamen; they are harder than the rest, and therefore called Petrosa, or Rocky; they are so thin about the middle that if you hold them against the light you may see through them; their form above is circular, beneath various, they stick out in diverse processes, and that externally towards the face, they have a crooked process, which being joyned with the process of the first Bone of the upper Cheek, make the Os Jugale; then they have a Mastois, or Dug-like process, because it represents the Udder of a Heifer; in age they have the Stylois which ends like a Bodkin, but this is more truly cal­led an Apendix than a Process; Inwardly the Bones of the Temples make the broad Process called Petrosum, in which the internal Cavities of the Ears are formed, & certain smal Bones of them which we shal shew in the sixteen Chapter; It hath three Cavities, whereof, one contains the passage of Hearing, the second receives the Joynt of the inferior Cheek, the third is common to the hinder part of the Head; It hath five holes, of [Page 53] which, the first is conspicuous in the rocky process and gives passage to the Nerve of the fift pair; the second is larger and unequal, scituated under the Bodkin-like Appendix, and sends the greater branch of the Artery Carotis, by the fift hole of the Os Cuneiforme to the Brain; the third is famous in bigness and common to the hinder part of the Head, and gives ingress to the Jugular Vein and the lesser branch of the Artery Ca­rotis and egress to the Nerve of the sixt pair; the fourth is observable between the Dug-like Process, and the Bodkin-like Appendix, and sends out the hard branch of the fift pair by a long channel; the fift, which in some bodies is wanting, is placed behind the Dug-like Process, and gives a branch of the external Jugular or passage through the Skull. To these they ad a narrow hole like a chink, and unequal, which pas­seth a small Artery from the fore side of the rocky Process. The rest of the holes obvious in this Process, we shall handle in the History of Hea­ring. The Bones of the Temples are joyned to the Bones of the fore part of the Head, by the scaly or false Sutures; they stick to the Bone of the Forehead, the Wedg-like Bone, and that of the hinder part of the Head.

The Bone in the hinder part of the Head is but one in such as are grown up, being thicker than the rest, although the lower part be thin­nest where it is strengthened by that long knob arising up to it: Its Ca­vities are nine, of which, two are remarkable, which contain the Pro­tuberances of the Cerebellum; its holes are very many, of which, the greatest passeth the marrow of the Back to the Vertebrae; It doth not constitute the second and third hole it self, but with the bone of the Temples, of which we spake before; neer to these is the fourth and fift, which is proper to the hinder part of the Head, little and round, by which the seventh pair of Nerves descend out of the Skull; to these sometimes is added a sixt and seventh hole, to which Nature appointeth the multiplied branches of the Vertebral veins and arteries; the hinder part of the Head is more even on the outside, but internally various, and in a manner resembles a figure of five sides, it is separated from the bones of the Fore part of the Head with the Suture Lambdois, from the middle and sides of the bones of the Temples by the Sphenois, also from the first Vertebra of the Neck, by a double Process both for its motion and secu­rity; in its meeting with the Lambdois and Sagittal Suture, sometimes there is a smal bone of a Triangular form, sometimes with a single, some­times with a double Lamen, although not exactly produced to the oppo­site places, which is an excellent Antidote for the Falling-sickness; to this, Nature often forms lesser bones, which are like to it, between the Liniaments of the true Sutures, consisting usually of a simple Lamen joy­ned to the inferior Lamen.

The Os Sphenois or Wedg-like Bone, makes up the Basis of the Skull; it is only one in such as are grown up, various in respect of thickness and thinness, and manifold in Form, for it is garnished with many Proces­ses, of which, some are external; and of these, some on the fore part, and for their figure sake are called Perigoides, or Wing-like, others on the back part, which are stretched out with two Tops towards the Bodkin-like [Page 54] Appendix; the internal Processes are various as well as the exter­nal, of which two are forewards, and form a broad beginning, end in a point, the backward Processes are as many, which are stretched out broad, when they are elegantly formed they have two points in their extremities lightly bowed in the middle; and these processes together with the space between them, are compared by Authors to the Saddle of a Horse; the Cavities of the Os Sphenois are many, that w ch is produced in the middle of the Saddle is famous above the rest, & receives the Glandula Pituitaria, neer which two others arise, which are smaller, also they are worthy to be noted which are in the wing-like Processes, which are long and deep Cavities and give security to the internal Muscle called Pteri­gois: In both sides of the Sphenois are seven holes, of which, the first is neer the foremost process of the Saddle, and admits the optick Nerve to the Eyes; the second from a round beginning ends in a chink, and through it is the second pair of Nerves and a Branch of the third carried to the Eye; also a large Branch of the Artery Carotis with the abounding humidity from the Glandula Pituitaria; the third hole which is under the second is very little and round, by which a Branch of the Nerve of the third pair is carried to the temporal Muscle, and Pterigoides; the fourth is on the external side of the Apple of the Eye, and resembles a large ditch unequally broad rather than a hole, by which the first branch of the Nerve of the fourth Conjugation, with that of the third pair is di­stributed to the temporal Muscle, and descending to the bottom of the upper Jaw, it is distributed partly to the Nose, partly to its sixt Bone, and sends a small branch to be distributed to the Pallat; the fift hole is under the posterior Process of the Saddle, long and rough, and gives passage to the greater Branch of the Artery Carotis; the sixt is observable on the external side of the same, oval in figure, and gives extramission to the fourth pair of Nerves; the seventh is neer the sixt, very small and round, and sends the smaller Branch of the Internal Jugular Vein, to the Dura Mater: The Os Sphenois is joyned to the first Bone of the up­per Jaw, as also to the fourth and sixt below the Pallat, on the sides to the Processes of the Bones of the Temples, before to the bone of the Forehead, and behind to that of the hinder part of the Head, by tke Su­tures called Mendosae and Harmoniae, which age most commonly obli­terates.

The Os Ethmois or Sieve-like Bone, is less than the orher Bones belon­ging to the Skull, and various in habit, it seems to be composed of six parts, of which the first and second is full of holes like a Sieve, and thence came the name to the whol Bone; it is covered with the Dura Mater, but it is full of pores, not only to take in air and smels, but also to put out excrements: the third is the interior process, not much unlike a Cocks Comb, rising between the Nerves of smelling, or the Papillar Processes of the Brain: the fourth is another part of the Process opposite to the former, thin yet hard, and distinguisheth the the Nostrils above: the fift nnd sixt parts are altogether spongious and full of holes, and guard the upper Cavities of the Nostrils on the sides, and almost equals the wideness of them: It is joyned to the Bone of the Forehead and to [Page 55] the second of the upper Jaw, and to the Os Sphenois by light Harmonia, which old age sometimes takes away.

The Jaws follow, of which, the superior is composed of twelve bones, six on each side; the first is joyned to the external angle of the Eye, and the foreward process of the Bone of the Temples, and by their proces­ses, make the Os Jugale: The second makes the inner angle of the Eye, and hath a large passage, by which the overflowing moisture of the Eyes descends to the Nostrils: The third is interposed between these two: The fourth is the greatest of all, and occupies a great part of the Cheek and Pallat, and gives holes to the upper teeth; it hath a conspicuous hole neer the apple of the Eye, by which a Nerve passeth from the third pair: The fift, together with its fellow, makes up the Nose: The sixt, with its fellow makes up the extremity of the Pallat; and all these are joyned rather by Harmonia than Sutures.

This Jaw is accounted movable in the Crocodile by the Ancients, not distinguishing his small Skull from his huge Jaw, with which it is lifted up when he moves his Jaw, his Body being neer the Earth by reason of the shortness of his feet; for what Bones soever make the superior Jaw in Crocodiles either of the Land or Water, are firmly joyned to the Skull by Harmonia: neither is it otherwise in Serpents and Fishes, in all which is the nexure of Bones; neither are there any Muscles properly moving the superior Jaw.

The inferior Jaw in age is but one Bone, famous both in hardness, thickness, and strength; It hath two Processes, the one acute called Co­rone; the other obtuse called Condylus: It hath holes for the Teeth as the superior Jaw hath: In the internal Superficies it hath two holes, for the beginnings of the aforesaid processes, by which a Branch of the Nerve of the fourth Conjugation is admitted to be distributed to the Teeth, In the external Superficies it hath also two, by which the same Branch passeth forwards to the lips, their Muscles and Skin: Lastly, by its thicker Process it is joyned to the rocky Bone, a Membranous Liga­ment being between.

The Jaws are singularly armed with the Teeth, which are small Bones and serve not only the chew the meat, but also by resisting the refluxion of the air, they help the better to pronounce the words: each Tooth receives an Artery from the Carotides, small veins from the Jugulars, and Nerves from the Branch of the fourth pair by which the Periostion which covers the Roots of them, and also the Teeth themselves are exquisite in sence. In Women there are fourteen, in Men fifteen, and often six­teen in one Jaw; in Men they are of a mean bigness, and differ partly in figure, partly in office; for some are sharp, which are called the Dog-Teeth; others, although they are acute, yet they have broader extre­mities than the Dog-Teeth, and are called Cutters, others are called Grinders, the furthermost of which come forth either in Man-hood or old age, and are called the Teeth of wisdom: the Cutters are four, pla­ced before, and are the first that appear in Children, on both sides of which, is a Dog-Tooth added, which are called Eye-Teeth, the rest of the Jaw the Grinders occupy, which are large, broad, and something un­equal, [Page 56] they are placed in the holes of the Jaws, either with three or four roots, or with but one, as the Cutters and Dog-Teeth, their jun­cture the Ancients call Gomphosis.

The Muscles which move these parts of the Head, remain yet to be spoken of, to wit, the Forehead, Eye-lids, Nose, Ears, Lips▪ and Jaws; On each side of the Forehead is one, which descending from its mid­dle region is ended in the Eye-brows, which lifteth it up, and wrin­kles it.

Two Muscles shut the Eye-lids, which by a semicircular Production, being extended from the internal angles to the external, shut them, and yet they are more properly one Muscle than two; to these they ad the Ciliar Muscle, which compassing the brims causeth the more exquisite shutting: A singular Muscle opens the Eye-lids, of which in the Fifteen Chapter.

The Muscles on each side lift up and diduce the Muscles of the No­strils, of which the first is like a Triangle, and descends from the top of the Nose by the sides, even to the wing; the other ariseth from the Bone of the Jaw neer it, and ends partly in the exterior wing of the Nose, and partly in the upper part of the Lip, thereby moving and lif­ting both of them up: Two slender Muscles dilate the wing of the Nose, which run Transversly by the top of the Nose; to these within the wing are two Muscles opposed, which are like them in bigness, produced from the extremities of the Bones of the Nose, and opened in each of its wings, which gently bind to the Nose, although the orbicular Muscles of the Lips help forward and finish this office.

The Muscles common to both Checks and Lips are called both the Quadrati and Buccinator; Galen calls the Quadratus a Musculous expansi­on, for indeed it is a Membrane placed under the fat, but hath an ob­lique contexture of fleshy fibrae; its beginning is broad from the Sternum, Clavicula, Neck, and Shoulder, it ends in the Chin, where sticking to the inferior Jaw, it draws it and the parts adjoyning to it downwards; the other is called Buccinator because it swels up in such as blow the Trumpet: It takes its original from the Gums of the upper Jaw, and being compas­sed within with the common Tunicle of the mouth; it ends in the infe­rior Jaw, and makes the inward hollowness of the Cheek.

Properly five pair of Muscles are subservient to the Lips, of which the first lifts up the upper Lip: Its beginning is from the upper Jaw where the Cavity of the Cheek is, and being compassed about with much fat it descends to the upper Lip; neer this from the very same Jaw ariseth another pair, thin and broad, which being inserted into the Lip moves it upwards: The third pair is fleshy and round, arising from the Os Jugale, and passing obliquely by the Cheeks, ends in the confines of both Lips, and draws them upwards to the sides: The fourth pair riseth a little lower, neer the sides of the inferior Jaw, and from a broad beginning by an oblique Process becomes slender, which draw the inferior Lip down­wards being inserted into the sides of it neer the end: The fift pair which is most conspicuous in fleshy Bodies, ariseth about the middle of the Chin, and ascendeth with right strings to the nether Lip, and de­presseth [Page] [Page 57] it: To these the binder together of the Lips is to be added, which their soft and spongy substance makes, which consists of fibrae turned in an Orb like a Sphincter: As for the Muscles of the Ears we shall speak of them when we speak of the Ears themselves, amongst which are those called Occipitals.

The motion of the inferior Jaw is very strong, and moved by strong Muscles, which are in number also five pair, the first pair is called Crota­phites, or Temporals, because being covered with the Pericranium, they arise with a thin and broad beginning, about the fore part of the Head and Bone of the Temples, the neerer it comes to the Os Jugale the thic­ker it is, under which descending, it ends in the acute process of the in­ferior Jaw, with a short yet strong Tendon, this draws it upwards: Its fibrae the more they recede from the middle, the more they pass oblique­ly toward the Tendon: wounds hapning in this pair of Muscles are not equally alike dangerous, for in its superior region being wounded by oblique stroaks, the hurt avoids death, in which place when by a fall the bone of the Temple is crackt, the life may be saved by setting to the trepan, but such hurts as afflict the lower and nervous part of it, en­danger life by convulsions. The second pair is called Digastricum or Biventre, and takes its original neer the Dug-like Process, this in its mid­dle passage grows to a Nervous or Tendinous Body, then it is fleshy again till it come to the fore part of the Chin, where it ends inwardly and draws the Jaw downwards, in which motion Nature hath provided a Ligament to stop its falling back too far: The Musculus Quadratus spo­ken of before concurs in office with this. The third pair is called Late­rale, and Masseterium, having partly a Nervous, and partly a fleshy be­ginning, arising from the superior Jaw and Os Jugale, and are broadly and strongly inserted into the nether Jaw, which by reason of the diver­sity of its strings, it moves to the right and left, and forwards. The fourth pair is called Pterygoides, or the internal Alar, so called because it proceeds from the internal seat of the Wing-like Process: it is fleshy and carried to the inferior part of the inward part of the inferior Jaw, by a broad and strong Tendon, which it draws up, and when it is tur­ned out, it draws it back. The fift pair is called Pterygoides or the exter­nal Alar; this begins often with a double body, and fleshy, from the external side of the wing-like process, and is also fastned in the internal side of the lower Jaw: It withdraws the inferior Jaw and moves it for­wards.

Place here the Table of the thirteenth Chapter, which hath the Number 15. at the corner of the brass Plate.

[Page]
AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF THE THIRTEENTH CHAPTER.

This Table contains the Muscles of the Face and inferior Jaw; also the bones of the Skull, and of both Jaws.

FIG. I.
  • AA The skin of the Head detracted.
  • BB The fleshy Pannicle separated.
  • CC The Pericranium detracted.
  • DD The Skull bare.
  • E The muscle of the Forehead.
  • FF The muscle that shuts the Eye-lids.
  • G The first muscle of the Nose.
  • H The second muscle of the Nose.
  • I The muscle dilating the wings.
  • K The muscle of the first pair lifting up the Lips.
  • L The muscle drawing the Lip upwards.
  • M The muscle drawing the Lip downwards.
  • NN The muscle shutting the Lips.
  • O The Buccinator.
  • PP The temporal muscle in his place.
  • Q The muscle lifting up the Ear.
  • R The muscle drawing the Ear obliquely.
  • S The muscle Masseter in his place.
  • TT The muscle Digastricus moved from his be­ginning.

FIG. II.
  • AAA The temporal muscle out of his place, the Jaw [...] being dissected.
  • aa Its acute insertion into the process of the Jaw.
  • BB The Masseter separated.
  • CC The Digastricus loosed at the end, and drawn aside.
  • DD The internal Pterygoides.
  • EEEE The external Pterygoides.
  • F The Musculus Quadratus, or musculous Ex­pansion separated.

FIG. III.
  • A The bone of the forehead.
  • aaa The Coronal Suture.
  • α The hole of the bone of the forehead for the Nerve of the third pair.
  • B The right bone of the fore part of the Head.
  • bb The Sagittal Suture.
  • C The left bone of the fore part of the Head.
  • D The bone of the Temples.
  • cc The false Suture.
  • d The Duglike process.
  • e The process of the Os Jugalis.
  • E The first bone of the upper Jaw.
  • F The Jugal process.
  • G The second bone of the Jaw hid with the sha­dow of the former.
  • H The third bone.
  • I The fourth bone of the Jaw.
  • i The hole in it for the Nerve of the third pair.
  • K The fift bone.
  • L The lower Jaw.
  • l The hole in it for the Nerve of the fourth pair to pass out.
  • M The sharp process of the inferior Jaw.
  • N The blunt process of the inferior Jaw.

FIG. IV.
  • A The left bone of the fore part of the Head.
  • aa The sagittal Suture.
  • B The right bone of the fore part of the Head.
  • bb The Suture Lambdois.
  • C The bone of the hinder part of the Head.
  • D The triangular bone.
  • Φ A portion of the bone of the Temples with the Duglike process.

FIG. V.
  • AA The cavity of the bone of the hinder part of the Head within the Skull, in which the Cere­bellum lies.
  • B The internal face of the Os Sphenois.
  • CC The Os Ethmois.
  • D The cavity of the bone of the forehead above the Nose.
  • aa The first hole in the wedglike bone.
  • αα The second hole.
  • bb The third hole.
  • cc The sixt hole.
  • * The seventh hole.
  • dd The fift hole.
  • ee The first hole of the bone of the Temples.
  • ff The rocky process of the bones of the Temples.
  • gg The third hole of the bones of the Temples.
  • hh The fourth and fift hole of the hinder part of the Head.

FIG. VI.
  • AA The lower part of the bone of the hinder part of the Head conspicuous.
  • aa The process by which the hinder part of the Head is joyned to the first Vertebra of the Neck.
  • BB Part of the bone of the Temples.
  • CC The duglike process.
  • DD The bodkinlike appendix.
  • EE The jugal process.
  • F The External face of the Wedglike bone.
  • GH GH The winglike processes.
  • I The bone which distinguisheth the Nostrils.
  • KK The sixt bone of the upper Jaw.
  • kk The hole which passeth the Nerve of the fourth pair to the Pallat.
  • LL Part of the fourth bone of the superior Jaw.
  • m The four Teeth called Cutters.
  • nn The two dog teeth.
  • oo The rest of the Teeth called Grinders.
[Page]

CHAP. 14. Of the Brain. and Cerebellum

THat the Brain it self which is the Temple of Wisdom and Memo­ry may come to view, it is necessary that we take away its cove­rings, and they are two Membranes, which the Greeks call Meninge, and the Arabians, Mater, and our Chyrurgians from them: the Arabians using to express the soft seat or covering of any thing by the name MOTHER.

Of these, that which doth not immediately cover the Brain, is called Crassa Meninx or Dura Mater, and it is endewed with not a few Veins and Arteries which ascend by the sides of it: The Veins come from the fore­most Branch of the internal Jugular, the Arteries from the greater and lesser Branch of the internal Carotis, both of them replenish it with Blood and vital Spirit; It loosly embraceth the Brain that so it may not hinder its increase; it is rough without, and smooth within, it is doubled with a double Process, of which, that which is stretched forwards above the middle of the Brain, for the figure sake, is called Falx, because it re­sembles a hook; the other is shorter, and defines the bounds of the Brain and Cerebellum.

By these Processes are certain Cavities or Channels made, some grea­ter, some lesser; Of the greater, two climb up the Cerebellum to the right and left by an oblique passage, by the sides of the hinder part of the Head, and in their beginnings they admit the greater Branch of the internal Jugular Vein; the third of the greater Cavities, being stret­ched along the longitude of the Falx, disperseth copious branches both to the Meninges and also to the middle of the Skull; here is often a col­lection of excrements and a filthy putrifaction, and sometimes callous matter and stones found in a Dissection; the fourth of the greater Cavi­ties is shorter, passing between the Cerebrum and Cerebellum, two Branches being first produced, it is partly bestowed upon the callous Body, and partly enters in two parts, the foremost Ventricles of the Brain, making a portion of the plexure called Chorois: Where there is a concourse and community of these Cavities, there that Funnel called Herophilianum is constituted: The Dura Mater is firmly joyned to the Sutures of the Skul, especially to the Os Sphenois; at other places it is at distance both from the Skull and the Pia Mater, as the increase and decrease of the Brain re­quires.

The other Membrane for the diversity of its habit is called Tenuis Meninx and Pia Mater: It is a very thin and soft Membrane, not only wrapping the Brain round, but also enrowling the turnings of many [Page 59] Veins and Arteries which accompany it, which may be easily separated from it.

The word Brain comprehends both that properly called so, and also the Cerebellum, it is made of a cleer substance of the Seed, and makes the animal Spirit, by which the Soul which is the Governess of the Body performs both Sence internal and external, and also voluntary motion, therefore in living Bodies it is swelled with gentle heat and Spirit; in dead Bodies being dissected in thin slices it shines like Alablaster: The Ancients thought the Brain was clouded or obscured by Melancholly, or vapors drawn up thither; Hippocrates rightly conceived that wounds passing deeply into its Cavities were mortal, and yet here is a huge dif­ference, either by reason of different properties in Nature, or the ambient air, for light offences either of the Skull or Meninges kill some presently, and others whose Brain it self is wounded escape, yea, although some part of it be taken away, and separated by reason of putrifaction, also the wound growing together, the leaden Instruments used in the cure, remain many yeers fixed in the Brain and Meninges.

The Brain receives Veins on each side from the internal branches of the Jugulars, and small passages from the Cavities of the Dura Mater car­rying Blood: It hath Arteries from the Carotides and those which rise up by the Vertebrae, which have but a single Tunicle like the Veins; the sub­stance of the Brain hath no Nerve at all, and therefore 'tis void of sence, although it give original to all the Nerves.

Its largeness in Man is famous, and it increaseth and decreaseth as the Moon doth; it is divided into the right part and the left, by the Hook-like Process of the Dura Mater; it hath diverse Cavities which we shall lay open in the particular dissection; it hath an evident heat, although compared with the other Bowels which are hotter, it may be accounted cold and moist; also it is made moist by accident, seing the vapors sent unto it from the Breast and Stomach, are turned into water, from whence flowing to the inferior parts (if it have not power to resolve them) it brings sickness in the small Guts: It is garnished with many circulations like the River Meander; above, it is round like a Sphere, and therefore Pliny calls it the Heaven of Man, because in figure it imitates the most Sacred and Noble part of the World: It is seated by the most wise God, within the strong defence of the Skull, and the Dura Mater: The Brain is moved like the Arteries, not so much by any inherent vertue of its own, as by vertue communicated by the Heart.

The Cerebellum is another part of the Brain, produced of the same substance with its self, and endewed with the same Vessels although fewer in number; it is nothing neer so big as the Brain, and must yeild to it in roundness, but it consists of more Lamens, it is hid within the large Cavities of the hinder part of the Head, and its office is consecrated to the MEMORY.

These things thus premised we come now to the Method of Dissecti­on, wherein the distinctions of the substances of the Brain are to be viewed, as also the callous Body; the two foremost Ventricles, the Speculum Lucidum, the Fornix, the Plexus Choroides; the third Ventricle [Page 60] and beside that the Eminences in the fore and hinder part of it, then the Brain being deduced to the sides, and the shorter Process of the Dura Mater being, draw away the Nerves of smelling: The first, second, third, fourth, and fifth Conjugation of Nerves, the Infundibulum and Glandula Pituitaria are to be observed, then the Brain and Cerebellum being turned to the right side, the Rete Mirabile, the Process and Cavity of the Cerebellum which is called the fourth Ventricle, and the beginning of the Marrow of the Back comes to view.

The substance of the Brain is double, the external which is softer and of a more ashy or yellow colour, and the internal which is more sol­lid and white; this they compare to the Marrow, the other to the Bark.

The Corpus Callosusn, or Callous Body is a hard portion of the Brain, conspicuous between its foremost division, under the sides of which the two foremost Ventricles lies: These Ventricles are the largest Cavities of the Brain, compassed with a thin skin, and by their bowing exceed in length its Marrowy substance, on the upper part from a broad and blunt beginning it grows something sharp towards the third Ventricle or com­mon Cavity; from hence on the backward parts, they grow roundish a­gain downwards towards the Basis of the Brain, and being bowed like a hook toward their first beginning, they are attenuated, and end neer the original of the Optick Nerves: They are divided into the right and left Ventricle, a thin partition passing between them and the substance of the Brain, which being withdrawn and held against the light is trans­parent, and therefore called Speculum Lucidum.

To this is joyned above, the Fornix, or vault, being a callous substance of the Brain; it obtained this name because like the vault of a House, it sustains the waight of the Brain, which else would fall down into the Ca­vities: It is underpropped with three legs, of which two are stretched out downwards towards the Basis of the Brain, and embracing the root of the Marrow of the Back neer the sides, which a singular prominence being neer, with a crooked vally they design the inferior Cavity of the foremost Ventricle on each side; Arantius gave the name of Hippocampus or Sea-horse, and Silk-worm to them: the third leg of the vault is stret­ched forward over the common Cavity of the said Ventricles.

Besides in the foremost Ventricles is obvious, the Plexus Choroides made of a subtil Membrane, and very small Glandulae, and smal branches of ves­sels variously infolded, both from the fourth Cavity, and the branches of the Carotis and Vertebral Arteries; That neat and wonderful distri­bution is seen by the lower Cavity of the Ventricles, in which, even as in the Rete Mirabile, the Blood is prepared for the Generation of the animal Spirit in the Brain; But the Ventricles before mentioned, together with those that follow, by the aprobation of Modern Physitians, are ordained for the collection of air and abounding flegm.

The chink, which is in the valley of the foremost ventricles, being lightly drawn aside makes the third ventricle of the Brain, according to the opinion of the Ancients; in which two passages are observable, of which the foremost is carried down to the Funnel, a Process sticking up, [Page 61] which they compare to a womans Privities; the hinder which they liken to the Fundament, is carried to the Cavity of the Marrow of the Back, and shews that space, which the beginnings of that marrow make by their mutual concourse, being famous with four protuberances, and maketh the fourth ventricle constituted between the Brain and Cerebel­lum; But that Cavity which the principal Authors of Anatomy call the fourth ventricle seeing it properly belongs to the Cerebellum, we will speak of it, when we come to it in order of Dissection.

Of those Protuberances, some are lesser and proper to the Brain, which are called Testicles; others greater, and called Buttocks from a certain similitude they bear to those parts: The Glandula Pinealis is neer these, so called because 'tis like a Pine-nut; It is in substance somewhat hard, reddish, easie to be resolved, and compassed about with a thin Membrane; it is set before the hinder passage of the third ventricle, to wit, the channel that passeth to the beginning of the Marrow of the Back: Now the superior parts of the brain being taken away by Dissection and drawn to the side, the Cerebellum appears, and the Basis of each be­ginning of the marrow of the back, from whence the Nerves take their common original.

The Nerves are vessels of the same substance with the Brain, thin and white Chords (if you except the first and second pair) which being cou­pled together by the Meninge, make long and round Channels, by which the Animal Spirit, which is the Author of sence and motion, is carried to the several parts of the Body; they have Veins and Arteries for their nourishment and vital heat; they have no Cavity discernable to the eyes, seing they seem to contain a whitish marrow within, which both wounds and obstructions in them sufficiently manifesteth, the dilligence of Nature in preserving them is admirable, for it brings the Nerves to the parts they are appointed for by a certain flexure; as they pass the holes of the Vertebrae, it defendeth and strengthneth them with a seminal substance, most of them make a plexure one with another, and make a substance like a swelling or contraction ere they pass further, as though they would unite their strength; in their progress they are harder.

Amongst the Nerves which take their original within the Skull, the Nerves of smelling come first to view; they take their slender beginning from the Basis of the Brain, beyond the hole of the rocky Process, which gives passe to the Nerve of the fift pair, and by degrees growing neerer together and thicker, they are extended above the Os Ethmois: the Process called Crist passing between, they make the swelling Pro­cesses called Mamillaxes with their extremities, and these in such Crea­tures whose smell is strong are larger.

The next pair are the Optick Nerves which the Ancients held to be the first, they are great but soft and more porous than the rest, they take their original backwards, from the beginning of the marrow of the back, where the two legs of the vault are stretched out, in the midst of their journey they are joyned that the spirit might more easily pass from one eye to another, then being separated they pass through each [Page 62] hole of the wedg-like Bone, to the right and left Eye, this pair being ta­ken away, the Infundibulum comes in sight, being a Membranous Channel like a Funnel, growing narrower by degrees from a broad Basis, and car­ries the redundant flegm to the Glandula under it: The Glandula it self is called Pituitaria, and is placed in the Saddle of the Wedg-like bone, and sends the moisture it receives by the holes next to it to the Pallat.

The second pair of Nerves are those that move the Eyes, and are therefore called Motorium; they take their original neer the former: at their beginning they are joyned, afterwards being severed, they pass to the Eyes by the second hole of the Wedg-like Bone, and to the Mus­cle which lifts up the upper Eye-lid, to the Adductor and the lesser ob­lique Muscle; to this we adjoyn that Nerve which is called the lesser Branch of the fift pair, which coming from the middle Basis of the Brain, passeth to the Muscle of the Eye called Abducens.

The third pair of Nerves takes its original behind from the basis of the Brain, and in its progress is joyned to the former in the hole of the Eye, which when it toucheth it is divided into two branches, whereof one passing above the Eye by the bony Channel, or hole of the Forehead, is distributed to the upper Eye-lid, the Skin, and the Muscles of the Fore­head: The other branch passeth under the eye, and proceeding between the two long Lamens, and sending branches both to the tunicle of the Nostrils, and to the temporal Muscle, it passeth by the hole of the fourth bone of the upper Jaw, to the Muscles of the upper Lip and others of the Face; some call this the first branch, some the first and second of the third pair, which joyns it self to the fourth pair; to this third pair we ad that small Nerve, which arising from the Basis of the Brain neer the prominences which are called Testicles entring the Apple of the Eye is carried to his Muscle called Trochlea.

The fourth pair ariseth from the Basis of the Brain with the former, but a little before it, and descends by the sixt hole of the Wedg-like bone, and after in its passage it hath bestowed branches upon the tem­poral Muscle, the internal Alar and the Buccae, to the Teeth of the upper Jaw, the Pallat and Gums, it is carried into the internal hole of the lo­wer Jaw, and gives branches to the roots of the Teeth, and passing out again at the external hole of the same Cheek, its distributed in the infe­rior lip and his skin, the branch of this pair which remaineth, passing by the Muscles in the mouth, it is distributed to the sides of the Tongue: That small Nerve is nothing else but a branch of this pair which the An­cients called the fourth pair, thinking it to be a pair by it self, and is di­stributed in the Pallat and his Tunicle.

The fift pair ariseth from the very beginning of the marrow of the Back where it is joyned to the Cerebellum, it passeth the first hole of the bones of the Temples; it is of one soft substance, and is the proper organ of Hearing, another harder which passeth through the hole called Cae­cum by the Ancients, slipping without the Skull between the Dug-like Process, and the Bodkin-like Appendix, and passeth to the Muscles of the Jaw, the skin both of the Jaws and Ears: Its Progress in the Ears see Chap. 16. Fig. 12.

The sixt pair riseth a little below the fifth, descending by the third hole of the Bone of the Temples, which is common to the hinder part of the Head, and being divided on each side into internal and external Bran­ches makes that famous plexure which we spake of in the third Chap­ter.

The seventh pair proceeds from the Marrow just passing out of the Skull, and is harder than the rest, and slips out of the Skull by the fourth and fift holes of the hinder part of the Skull; having passed the Skull with its common covering, it joyns its self to the sixt pair, from which being separated it is distributed partly to the Cartilages of the Hyois, partly to the Tongue it self, of which see Chapter 3. Figure 8. and Chapter 11. Figure 14. The beginnings of the Nerves and the Glandula Pituitaria being separated out of the Cavity of the Saddle, about the Ba­sis of the brain, that plexure of the Carotides and Vertebral Arteries is to be heeded; Ancient Writers called it Retiformis, but Modern Rete Mi­rabile, than which, a ruder expression in the brain of man admits no com­parision. Its use is the same with the Plexus Chorois.

The Cerebellum is a sollid body if you compare it with the Brain, and is divided into two parts like Globes, between which the two Processes called Vermi formis appear, to which about the hinder part of the Trunks of the marrow of the Back, a third is seen, which Varolius calls the Bridg of the Brain, although this be not alwaies simple, but sometimes unequal with certain bunches sticking up.

The Cerebellum being turned over with the Brain, and that portion of the marrow of the back annexed to it, the globes of the Cerebellum being gently drawn aside, in the basis of them appears a Cavity which the best Anatomists call the fourth ventricle, Herophylus calls it the principal ventricle, Arantius the Cistern: Its compass is round, yet something broad, and distinguished with two Cavities, at the entrance of it, where the Cavity of the marrow of the back is, the worm-like process hangs over it, and a thin Membrane is drawn over it, in it, the purer air drawn out of the former ventricles, is kept for the refreshing of the ani­mal Spirit.

The Marrow of the Back depends upon both Brain and Cerebellum, be­ing but a doubled Trunk of them both, from whence it passeth down the large Cavities of the Vertebrae which serve like a sheath for it, and sends out Nerves which are distributed to the whol Body; it is covered with two Membranes as the brain is, but in its progress is of a harder substance: it hath veins and arteries distributed to it through the holes of the Verte­brae that it may be furnished with Blood and vital Spirit; about its be­ginning as we told you, it is manifestly divided and gives a round Ca­vity, which ends in a poynt by degrees, distinguished by a small chink which Herophilus compares to a writing pen; It is joyned by degrees in its progress; to external view it is single, but considered in its self it is manifold, and divided into almost innumerable small Nerves, more or fewer, of which the Membrane encompassing collects into one branch, and distributes into pairs through so many holes of the Vertebrae.

In the Vertebrae of the Neck are seven pair, which are distributed to the Muscles of the Head Neck and Shoulders, Arms and Hands, of which in the last Chapter: The Marrow of the Back hath twelve pair, dedicated to the Membranes of the Breast, Back, and Muscles of the Ribs: The Loyns have five pair; the Os Sacrum six, which shall be de­scribed in the last Chapter.

Place here the first, second, and third Tables of the fourteenth Chapter, which hath the Numbers 16, 17, and 18. at the corners of the brass Plates.

[Page]
THE FIRST TABLE OF THE FOUR­TEENTH CHAPTER UNFOLDED.

This Table shews, the Brain laid bare from the Skull, with the Dura and Pia Mater; also its Cavities and Processes.

FIG. I.
  • AA The Dura Mater covering the Brain.
  • aa The Veins and Arteries distributed on it.
  • B The Brain covered only with the Pia Mater.
  • bb The Circumvolutions of the Brain.
  • ccc The Vessels distributed to the Pia Mater from the third Cavity.
  • C The Dura Mater drawn backwards.

FIG. II.
  • AA The longer Process of the Dura Mater called Falx, turned out of its Scituation.
  • aa The third cavity of the Dura Mater open.
  • bb The lesser inferior cavity of the same.
  • BB A portion of the callous body laid to view.
  • CCCC The brain deduced a little to the sides.
  • cccc The vessels in the fourth cavity, stretched o­ver the callous body.
  • DD The Dura Mater hanging down on each side.

FIG. III.
  • AA The substance of the Brain.
  • BB The callous body drawn a little outwards.
  • bb The two Legs of the Vault something unco­vered.
  • C The hooklike process drawn backwards.
  • DD The right fore ventricle opened on the upper part.
  • EE The left fore Ventricle opened on the upper part.
  • FF The Plexus Choroides.
  • G Part of the Speculum Lucidum.
  • HH The Dura Meninx detracted on each side.

FIG. IV.
  • AA The brain explained by equal Section.
  • B The Fornix taken up and bowed down­wards.
  • CC The superior part of the right fore ventricle deducted.
  • DD The superior part of the left fore ventricle in like manner explained.
  • E The chink designing the third Ventricle.
  • FF The Dura Mater.
  • a The Glandula Pinealis.
  • bb The Protuberances, called Buttocks.
  • cc The Protuberances called Testicles
  • d The Protuberance likned to a womans Pri­vities. These are better expressed in the first Figure of the following Table.

FIG. V.
  • AA. BB. CC. The brain and foremost ventricles ex­plained in their upper part.
  • f A portion of the Plexus Choroides stret­ched upwards by the foremost ventricles
  • D The shorter process of the Dura Mater.
  • EEE The longer process thereof.
  • F The Torcular of Herophilus.
  • G The Dura Mater detracted.
  • a The first cavity of the Dura Mater.
  • b The second cavity of the Dura Mater.
  • ccc The third cavity of the Dura Mater.
  • ddd The lesser cavity in the booklike process.
  • e The fourth cavity of the Dura Mater.

FIG. VI.
  • AA BB CC ff signifie the same they did in the fift Figure.
  • DD The Cerebellum conspicuous in his natural place.
  • E The wormlike process of the Cerebellum.
  • FF The Dura Mater hanging down.
  • GG The same with the cavities rowled down­wards.
[Page]
[Page]
AN EXPLANATION OF THE SECOND TABLE OF THE FOUR­TEENTH CHAPTER.

This Table presents in larger Figures the Cavities both of the Brain and Cerebellum, as they are shewed by the Dissections of the Ancients.

FIG. I. Shews the inferior Cavity of the foremost Ventricles of the Brain, the original of the optick Nerves, the fourth Ventricle with its Protuberances, the Legs of the Vault, and whatsoever Arantius compared by the Sea-horse, or Silk-worm.
  • AAAA The Dura Mater detracted.
  • B The Process of the sieve-like Bone like a crist.
  • CC Part of the Os Sphenois, shewing it self under the membrane, the Brain being ta­ken away.
  • DD The foremost process of the Os Sphenois, making the Cavity of the Saddle.
  • EEEE A portion of the Brain left.
  • F The foremost leg of the Vault bowed fore­wards.
  • GG The hinder legs of the Vault.
  • HH The Sea-horse, or Silk-worms of Arantius.
  • IIII The inferior Cavity of the foremost ven­tricles.
  • K The extremity of the callous body sticking out like Buttocks.
  • L The Glandula Pinealis.
  • MM The Protuberances called Testicles.
  • NN The cavity between the Brain and Cere­bellum commonly called the fourth ven­tricle.
  • OOOO Part of the Plexus Chorois bowed back­wards, which is carried by the superior cavity of the ventricles.
  • PP The foremost portion of the Basis of the Brain.
  • Q The bottom of the third ventricle in which behind is the hole likned to the Funda­ment; it tends to the beginning of the marrow of the back; before is the hole compared to the womb, and is carried to the Funnel.
  • RRRR A portion of the Plexus Chorois turned backwards, which is extended to the fourth inferior cavity.
  • SS The roots of the optick Nerves.
  • T The uniting of the optick Nerves.
  • Ʋ Ʋ The optick Nerves again severed and pas­sing towards the Eyes.

FIG. II. This Figure shews the proper Ventricle of the Cerebellum, which the best Anatomists call the fourth Ventricle.
  • AAAA Each [...] of the Cerebellum whol.
  • BBBB The internal face of the Cerebellum laid open by incision.
  • CC The worm-like Process of the Cerebellum whose superior and round part is taken a­way.
  • DD The proper Ventricle of the Cerebellum, with its two cavities.
  • E The prominence conspicuous between the two cavities.
  • F The passage from the third ventricle to the marrow of the back.
  • G The Cavity of the marrow of the back like a pen.
  • H The chink in the said cavity.
  • II The descending trunk of the marrow of the back cut off.
[Page]
[Page]
AN EXPLANATION OF THE THIRD TABLE OF THE FOUR­TEENTH CHAPTER.

This Table shews the rise of the Nerves within the Skull, also the principal branches of the third and fourth pairs, the Glandula Pituitaria with the Funnel, the Rete Mirable, the fourth Ventricle and the most special Veins arising from the marrow of the Back.

FIG. I. Shews the Brain a great portion of it being taken away above with the Cerebellum diducted to the side.
  • A The Nerve of smelling.
  • a Its process called Mamillaris.
  • B The Optick Nerve or first pair.
  • CC The Nerve of the second pair.
  • DD The Nerve of the third pair.
  • EE The Nerve of the fourth pair.
  • FF The Nerve of the fift pair.
  • GG The Nerve of the sixt pair. The Nerve of the seventh pair by reason of its deep rise appears not.

FIG. II. The side of the skull being broken off, together with the Eye whol, and the cheek divided, is shewed.
  • A The Nerve of the third pair.
  • B Its branch which goes out at the hole of the bone of the forehead.
  • C A branch of the same pair which goes out by the hole of the fourth bone of the upper Jaw.
  • D The Nerve of the fourth pair.
  • E Its branch which goes to the teeth and gums of the upper Jaw.
  • F Its branch which is carried to the Tongue.
  • G Its branch which enters the lower Jaw.
  • H The same branch which passeth out at the hole of the lower Jaw.

FIG. III. The Brain with the Marrow of the back being tur­ned, these things come to view.
  • AA The Nerves of swelling.
  • aa Their Dug-like processes.
  • BB The two legs of the Nerves of the first pair.
  • CC The greater branch of the Artery Carotis, the interior being joyned to the Vertebral Artery OO
  • D The Glandula Pituataria.
  • E The Funnel.
  • F The Protuberances of the Brain, set before the passage which carries the flegm to the Funnel.
  • GG The Nerves of the second pair cut off.
  • HH The beginnings of the Nervs of the third pair.
  • II The beginning of the Nervs of the fourth pair.
  • KK The beginning of the Nerves of the fift pair.
  • LL The beginning of the Nervs of the sixt pair.
  • MM The beginning of the Nervs of the seventh pair
  • NNN The beginning of the marrow of the back, between the skull and the first Vertebra.
  • OO The common branch of the Vertebral artery, which being divided after its union with the Carotis artery CC makes up the Rete mirabile with it, about the seat of the Wedg-like bone.
  • PPPP Smal branches of Arteries called the Rete mi­rabile.

FIG. IV.
  • AA The Cerebellum and his globes.
  • B The wormlike process of the Cerebellum.
  • CCCC The process of the Cerebellum, called the bridg.
  • DD The beginning of the marrow of the back.
  • E The cavity of the marrow of the back, called the pen.
  • F The fourth Ventricle laid open.

FIG. V.
  • A The trunk of the marrow of the back descen­ding as it may be publickly shewed being taken out of the body.
  • BB The branches arising from the three pairs of Nerves of the Neck, and two of the Breast, to be distributed to the hands.
  • bb The small branches running to the muscles of the shoulder.
  • CC The first pair of Nerves of the hands.
  • DD The second pair.
  • EE The third pair.
  • FF The fourth pair.
  • GG The fift pair.
  • HH The sixt pair called Subcutaneus.
  • IIII The pairs of intercostal Nerves, the two lo­wermost of which pertain to the Loyns.
  • K The first pair which is carried to the Foot.
  • LL The second pair.
  • MM The third pair.
  • NN The fourth and greatest pair.
  • O The smal Nervs of the marrow of the back, which are carried to the bladder and muscles of the Fun dament, and to the Genitals of both Sexes.
[Page]

CHAP. 15. Of the EYES.

AMongst all the external Sences, the Sight carries the Prehemi­nence, which is seated in the cleer Orbs of the Eyes, which the Ancients rightly called the windows of the mind whereby it ex­erciseth its visible part, and the fire-brands of Love.

The Eye-lids are first of all to be viewed, which are the coverings of the Eyes, without them they have a thin skin but no fat, within they are covered with the Pericranium; a fleshy Membrane intercedes these, with which two Muscles which are the shutters too of the Eye-lids are intertexed, which we mentioned in the thirteenth Chapter; also the Muscle which lifts up the superior Eye-lid, which takes its beginning within the Eye, about the hole of the Optick Nerve, and being dedu­ced from a thin and fleshy beginning, it ends in the brim of the said Eye-lid with a broad and subtil Tendon: Their extremities are Cartilagi­nous, which Cartilages the Greeks call Tharsos; for their more firm ope­ning, and for their exact closure they have a small Muscle.

When they are open they make two angles, which the ancients called Canthi, the one on the outside which is less, neer which, within the com­pass of the Eye lies a famous Glandula, the internal corner is larger, [Page] [Page 65] within which lies a spongy Caruncle, and soft, neer the Bone of the Nose, which stops the flowing of tears by the Nostrils; and for that ve­ry cause is called Lacrymalis; in the Cartilaginous brims of the Eye-lids, about the greater angle are two small holes, a callous lightly hanging o­ver them, which are called Puncta Lacrimalia, because if you put a Hogs bristle into them they produce tears, they are most conspicuous in great Beasts, and Men that are prone to weep. But how comes it to pass you will say that tears are so rife and ready in time of grief? Truly, not from the Eyes, but from the Brain, by the second hole of the wedg-like bone, also from the top and sides of the Head they flow to the foremen­tioned holes; hence it comes to pass that the skin between the external angle of the Eye, and the Helice of the Ear, together with the panicle un­der it being wounded, much watry substance issues out, and continual weeping against ones will instantly ceaseth.

To the extremity of the Eye-lids are hairs inserted, growing out straight, and when they are grown to their natural length, cease grow­ing; these not only keep small bodges which fly in the air from getting into the Eye, but also by giving a gentle shadow they make the sight the more piercing; but this famous use is lost so often as these hairs are thicker than naturally they should be, and when they are turned inward and prick the Eyes.

The office of the Eye-lids is conspicuous, Viz. to moisten the Eyes, to open, shut and defend them, and their office is of so great necessity Nature will perform, when we are so far from willing of it, that we ne­ver think of it, for it is very rare to forbear winking when any thing threatens.

To the confines of the Eyes and Forehead, hath the Divine Creator produced the Eye-brows, being a thick skin sticking out, and rough with hair, not so much for beauty sake and to shadow the Eye, as to keep the sweat which falls down from the Forehead out of them.

But the Eyes themselves which are the organs of Sight, are variously furnished with vessels, Muscles, Membranes and Humors: of the Veins some are external and visible on the white of the Eye, other some are in­ternal and hidden; the external veins proceed from the external bran­ches of the Jugulars; the internal, which accompany the optick Nerve from the internal Jugulars, and are helped by the Plexus Choroides. The original of the Arteries is not unlike this, the interior of which arise from the exterior Branch of the Carotides; the internal come from the Carotides, where with the Vertebrals they make the Rete Mirabile; hence it comes to pass that in external provocations the blood being mingled with Spirit the Eyes look red, and sometimes are inflamed: they have diverse Nerves, the most famous of which, is the Optick Nerve, which carries the visive vertue to the Eye, and by its expansion, or opening a­broad of its own substance, seems to bestow a three-fold Tunicle upon the Eyes; the next to this is less, which with the two small Nerves its companions, distributes its Branches to the two Muscles of the Eyes, which are called Motorii from their office, which we discoursed of in the foregoing Chaprer.

The bigness of the Eyes in a Man grown up is mean; in number they are two, that so when the one is hurt the common office might be per­formed by the other, and yet their consent is admirable, so that the one being hurt by internal causes against Nature, the other is hurt also, or else grows weaker, or is blood-shot. If we look upon their qualities by reason of their contained humors, they are cold and moist, and yet this is wonderfully lesned by the copious influx of heat and Spirits, by so many vessels, whereby waxing hotter than a natural mean, they not only infect Looking-glasses being held neer them, but also other mens Eyes with the same distemper.

Nay, the Eyes have light in themselves, and a certain Splendor not on­ly in the humors but also in the Membranes; indeed this is but mean in Man, because the actions God hath ordained for him are to be perfor­med in the day time, but it is greater in such living creatures as get their food by night, the inbred light of whose Eyes overcomes the darkness round about them; there is scarce another part of mans Body that gives more manifest signs of health and sickness than the Eyes do: In a man that is in health, they are full and bright; in a Man that is ill, they are sunk, sad, troubled, or obscure, till death hath overcome Nature, that they fail in strength and sight, and give warning of changing this life for another. Lastly, Consider that the Ancients were perswaded that the whol force of the mind was insisted in the Eyes, and that there was no Beast so fierce, but if his Eyes were covered would be milder.

Their figure ought to be round, not so much that they might move the easier, as that they might receive visible objects the better; they carry the same form the Stars do, that by them we may measure their rising and sitting, and therefore it was a custom amongst the ancient Romans, to carry men that were neer death out into the air that they might be­hold the Heavens: The wise Creator hath placed them in a high and strong hole of the Skull; high, that they might perform their office of watchfulness the better, and strong amongst the Bones that they might be the better defended from wrong.

But that we may the better know their actions, we will view, first their Muscles, then their Membranes, and last of all, their Humors; the Muscles which move the Eyes of Man, are six in number, which have fat about them to defend them from the injury of coldness and driness: Of these, such are called Recti as perform the right motions of the Eyes; some are called Oblique, whose magnitude and thickness is almost equal with the right; they take their beginning from that internal bone, about the large holes which admit the Nerves, and are carried under that Tu­nicle called Annata, to that which is called Cornea; these are four in number, of which, the first lifts up the Eye, and is called Superbus, be­cause proud people usually go with their Eyes elevated: The next op­posite to the first depresseth the Eye, which action because it is a note of modesty, the Muscle is called Humilis: The third draweth the Eye right to the inner angle, and is called Bibitorius, because when people drink they turn their Eyes inward that they may look in the Cup: The [Page 67] fourth draws the Eye to the external angle, and is called Indignatorius, because men lear on that fashion when they are angery; these are the right Muscles.

The Oblique Muscles are two, and are called Amatorii, because the glances of the Eyes intice Lovers; Of these, that which is less and infe­rior in Scituation, riseth in that place; the first Bone of the Jaw, is joy­ned to the fourth in extream part of the inferior Orbita. It ascends obliquely upwards towards the outward angle of the Eye-lid, and passeth with a short Tendon to the Iris, and turns the Eye obliquely downwards, towards the outward angle; the other oblique Muscle which is called the greater, is longer and higher in Scituation, and hath the same beginning with the third of the right Muscles, neer the internal angle of the Eye, it enters the Cartilaginous Trochlea, with a thin begin­ning, from whence passing obliquely, by the superior part of the Eye, it ends neer the end of the oblique Tendon of the inferior Muscle, and turns the Eye about towards the internal angle.

The Membranes which include the Eye are common and proper; The first of the common is called Adnata or Conjunctiva, neither is it any thing else than the Pericranium, spread abroad to the Eye-lids, and white of the Eye. The other is called Innominata, and seems to be nothing else but a subtil expansion of the Tendons and Muscles, especially the right ones, and is produced to the circumference of the Iris or Cornea Mem­brana.

The first of the proper Membranes is called Sclerotes, or hard, by rea­son of its thickness and habit; on the fore part which is transparent it is called Cornea, because in cleerness it resembles a thin Horn; it sticks something out on the fore part.

The second of the proper Membranes is called Ʋvea; on the fore part it is far thinner than the former, and hath diverse colours, behind it hath a certain black smootiness; that this is requisite for the more per­fection of sight, is probable by this Argument, Because in the Embrion in the Womb, even before the Eys are cover'd w th the Eye-lids, it is produ­ced by Nature of a blackish color, manifesting it self through the Scelotes; that portion of it which is transparent through the Cornea, is called Iris, by reason of its variety of colours; it hath a manifest hole in it called Pupil­la, through which, as through a window, it discerns the Species of visi­ble objects: It is free from any nexure both before and behind, notwith­standing in the Circumference of the Cornea; being firmly joyned to the bounds of the Sclerotes, it makes that Ligament which Authors call Ciliare, from which according to the latitude of the Ʋvea, towards the Christal­line humor, certain small strings run like black lines, like the hair of the Eye-lids; by their help the hole of the Ʋvea, is contracted and dilated, and the Christalline humor it self suffers gentle motion.

The remaining and greater part of the second Membrane, which compasseth about the hinder part, and sides of the Eye, and where it is knit to the Sclerotes is called Choroides, both because it compasseth the Eye, and because it is endewed with not a few smal veins; and as the Al-wise Creator made the Corneal Tunicle cleer, that so the visible object might [Page 68] touch the internal or illuminated part of the Eyes, so he made the second Membrane opacous, that the visible Image being re­ceived into the Eye, might be the more cleer by the shadow round a­bout it.

The third of the Membranes is called Retiformis, or Amphiblestroides; It is soft and of a Mucous substance; it obtained its name, because being put into the water it is like a little Net: It is stretched from the very centre of the Optick Nerve above the vital humor, even to the Ciliar Ligament.

The fourth Membrane is called Christalina, and compasseth the Chrystalline humor before, and is as thin as a Cobweb, and was therefore called Aranea.

The fift and last Membrane is called, Vitrea, embracing the Vitreal Humor, famous both for its lightness and thinness; in the Eyes of Living Creatures being made thick by a gentle boyling, both this and the former may be discerned from the humor they contain in them.

The Humors of the Eyes come now in play, which are in number three; the Aqueal, Chrystalline, and Vitreal; all of them cleer and void of any co­lour, that the Idea of visible things which have colours may be the bet­ter discerned.

Of the Humors, the Aqueal is the first, thinnest, and most fluid, moistning the Christalline humor, and that part of the Vitreal which is next it; it is distributed as well within as without the Uveal Mem­brane: It is gathered before within the Cornea, behind by the Christalline and Vitreal Tunicle, and comprehended with the Ciliar Ligament.

The Christalline humor excels the rest by far in soliddity, cleerness, and splendor: It is produced by Nature from a cleer portion of the Seed, and makes the very Fundamental of the Eyes, so that they err that think it to be void of heat and spirit, and also of true nourishment, for its original is of Seed, and it encreaseth like other parts: It is in form like a little lentil, of a compressed roundness, in what part it looks to­wards the Pupilla, and is next the Aqueal humor; that side of it which lies in the Cavity of the Vitreal humor, is beheld in a longer Sphear; nei­ther is this alwaies so, for sometimes the fore part is most globous, the hinder part more obtuse, and sometimes both sides are alike: It is pla­ced in the midst of the Eye, yet so as it sticks out most on the fore side.

The Vitreal humor is greater than the other two, and is like melted glass, not only in substance, but also in bright colour; it occupies all the Cavity of the Eye that is left by the other two; behind, and on both sides it is round; before, it hath a Cavity, in which is placed the Chri­stalline humor.

The action of the Eyes is Sight; in which, if you regard the expression of the visible Species within the Eye, the Christalline Humor hath the preheminence: If you regard the sensibility of this expression, then the optick Nerve and the expansion of it by the Net-like Tunicle hath the preheminence.

Also it ought to be doubtful to none, that the Eyes are the procu­rers of love, for not only colours, but the universal figure and Har­mony of things is committed to them by the Mind, and the Grace and Beauty attending them.

Place here the Table of the fifteenth Chapter, which hath the Number 19. at the corner of the brass Plate.

[Page]
AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF THE FIFTEENTH CHAPTER.

This Table comprehends the Eye-lids with the Muscle called Levator; also the proper Muscles of the Eyes; the Membranes and the Humors included in the Membranes.

FIG. I.
  • AA The Levator muscle of the superior Eye-lid.
  • B Its tendon thinly opened.
  • CC The Cartilages of the Eye-lids.
  • DD The Caruncle in the internal angle.
  • dd The Puncta Lacrymalia.
  • E The external angle of the Eye-lid.

FIG. II.
  • AA The Fat behind the Eyes.
  • BBB The muscles of the Eyes not separated.
  • CC Part of the Eye covered with the tendons of the muscles.

FIG. III.
  • A The right muscle lifting up the Eye.
  • aaa &c. Small Nerves carrying motion, sence, and spirit.
  • B The right muscle depressing the Eye.
  • C The right muscle drawing to the Eye.
  • D The right muscle drawing the Eye from.
  • E The inferior oblique muscle, whose tendon is but only separated from the part of that which fol­lows.
  • F The superior oblick muscle.
  • G The Trochlea of the same muscle.
  • H The Sclerotes covering the hinder part of the Eye.
  • II A portion of the Optick Nerve inserted into the Eye.

FIG. IV. Shews a Sheeps Eye, and in it the seventh muscle which Man needs not.
  • ABCD The four right muscles.
  • E The inferior oblick muscle, which here is large.
  • F The superior oblick muscle which is slender.
  • G The Trochlea of the superior oblick muscle.
  • H The seventh muscle of Brutes drawing the Eye to.
  • I The hinder part of the Eye covered with the ten­don of the seventh muscle.
  • K A part of the optick Nerve included in the se­ventrh muscle.

FIG. V.
  • ABCD Shew the am e with the former, the oblick muscles being removed.
  • aaaa The common membrane celled Innominata.
  • bb The Iris transparent through the Cornea.

FIG. VI.
  • AAA The Membrane Sclerotes dissected.
  • B The Membrana Cornea.
  • C A part of the optick Nerve.

FIG. VII.
  • A The Membrana Uvea.
  • a The hole in the Uvea or Pupilla.
  • BB The Ciliar Ligament with its strings.
  • CC The Membrana Choroides looking black.

FIG. VIII.
  • AA The Net-like Membrane.
  • aa A Rupture in it upon the Vitrial, which by reason of its softness is unavoidable in a Dissection.
  • BBB The Membrana Choroides not yet separated.
  • CCC The thickness of the Membrane Sclerotes.
  • D Part of the optick Nerve.

FIG. IX. The three humors of the Eyes received in a Vessel.
  • A The Crystalline Humor posited in the Cavity of the Vitreal.
  • BB Some appearance of the Ciliar strings.
  • CC The Vitrial humor.
  • DD The aqueal humor, being but little, and placed round about the Vitrial.
[Page]

CHAP. 16. Of the EARES.

EVen as the Eyes conduce to the pleasure of the life of Mortals, for the use of the light, and are therefore most precious parts of the Body, Even so the Organs of Hearing are excellent for the learning of Wisdom and Discipline: Of these, some parts are manifest to the Eyes, and others hidden within the holes of the Os Petrosum.

The manifest part of this Organ they call the Ear, Auricula, and more distinctly the external Ear: This consists of diverse parts, of skin, some small fat, and a fleshy Membrane underneath, but properly of a Cartilage, a lobe, and private vessels: The Cartilage is the uppermost and largest portion of the external Ear, that the passage of Hearing may be kept open night and day: Its Cavities and Productions are not easily beaten out of play, for by their soft bowing, they yeild to the Head when it lies down, and to other external things, but especially they force the sound they receive strongly inwards.

A soft substance occupies the inferior part which is called Lobus; it is more like fat than flesh, and in this, being pierced through, people wear Jewels: Women in old time used to lay out more cost in nothing than in Pearls to hang in their Ears; neither are the Arabian Women less mad who hang huge Rings there, and hold it a grace also to wear such in the sides of their Noses.

These parts have Veins from the external and internal Jugulars, Ar­teries from each Carotis and two Nerves, produced especially from the second pair of the marrow of the Neck, to which a small branch is to be added from the hard portion of the fift pair, which passeth by the hole called Caecum, and these creep along the sides and lower part of the Ear.

Nay, least any thing should be wanting to the perfection of this noble Sence in Man, the Divine Creator hath placed two Muscles about the Cartilage we spake of, which for their singular thinness Galen calls Peri­graphius or Linaments of Muscles, expressed in the Membrane under the fat, with a Fleshy fibrous intertexture, sometimes more plainly, some­times more obscurely, that that being stretched out, so often as we would hearken attentively, and the lower part of the Ear being gently drawn back; by the help of these Muscles it passes more directly to the Mem­brane of the Timpanum: Of these, that which moves the Cartilage up­wards and forwards, being placed upon the temporal Muscle, descends next the external beginning of the Muscle of the Forehead, and growing narrower by degrees; it ends in the Ear, in the upper part of it: Those which move the Ear obliquely upwards and backwards, are held to be five; amongst which, most commonly with that which went before, that is numbred, arising from the Muscles of the hinder part of the Head, passeth Transversly downwards above the Dug-like process, and sticks to the root of the Cartilage, sometimes with two, sometimes with three distinct Tendons.

The magnitude of the external Ear of Man is but small, and easily co­vered with the Hair: In respect of its disposition, it is cold and dry: In figure it is almost oval, yet not without various protuberances, of which that w ch makes the extream brim of it for its wreathed flexure is called Helix, the next which is inner and answers to the first is called Anthelix: the eminences which behold the Temples and are roughest with hairs, in some they have a thick tuft like a Goats beard, is called Tragus, and that opposite to it Antitragus. The Cavities of the Ears are three, the one interior, which is the Portal of the passage of Hearing; the other is drawn about this, and from its similitude to a Shell, called Concha: be­tween the Helix and Anthelix, is a third comprehended, for which, Au­thors are yet to seek of a name. The most wise Creator hath placed the ears in the upper part of the Body, because the air soonest carries sounds upwards: The Cartilage is joyned to the Os Petrosum by a strong Liga­ment, which is produced from the Pericranium; the rest is joyned to the Body by the Tendons of the Muscles, and the common coverings.

The use of the Ears is not the ornament of the Head, nor yet to hang Jewels in, although Nature hath left certain footsteps of a hole in each Lobus, nor yet the defence of the Brain which is sufficiently defended by its own proper muniments, but that the aerial sound being collected and received by so many Cavities, may more directly pass to the internal Ca­verns of the Ear, and therefore although this external Ear be wanting in very many living Creatures, yet it is palpable by this, that in man it conduceth to the perfection of he [...]i [...] because such as have lost their [Page 71] Ears (not for their honesty) or have them mutilated by cold, or the Cavities stoppped whereby detriment comes to the hearing, they remedy it by holding the Cavity of their Hand over their Ear.

These are very many Glandulae about the Ear, which drink up the re­dundant humor, and underprop the vessels, which Hippocrates by reason of their neerness, calls Parotides.

But that internal and true Organ of Hearing, is placed in the rocky Process of the Bone of the Temples, being not only safe by reason of its hardness, against the violence of external injuries, but also the fitter to retain the sound by reason of its dryness: Its Cavities and turnings are very many; four are especially related by the Authors of Dissections which have relation to the use of Hearing, namely the passage of Hea­ring, Timpanum, Labyrinthus, and Cochlea.

The passage of Hearing beginning from the Concha of the external Ear, is cloathed with a thin skin and a Membrane with some fat, and with the Pericranium, even to the borders of the Timpanum: It hath a wrea­thed passage turning something upwards, that so things which outward­ly fall into it, may not come to the Timpanum, and corruption gathered within it may the readier be carried out: In the passage of hearing is a viscous humor gathered, yellowish in colour and bitterish in tast, which is a present remedy for wounds and ulcers; the Ancients called it Ceru­men, and the place it self in which it is found the Hive of the Ears, and we in England call it Ear-wax: It hath its use, for such things as creep in­to the Ears, are intangled in it, as it were in Bird-lime, and so offended with its bitterness that they cannot pass to the Timpanum. In the end of the passage of Hearing is a Membrane, which the Ancient Greeks called by the common Name Meninge, or the Lymen of the Ear, but Modern Anatomists, by reason of that eminent Cavity which is neer it, call it the Membrane of the Timpanum; it is the internal covering of the Ear and very thin, yet by reason of its singular clamminess, it is a Nervous Liga­ment firm enough, that it not only sustains the external force of the air without any prejudice, but by its driness preserves the Species of the sound, and sends it into the internal Cavities of the Ear; it seems to be but an expansion of the Periostion, which being separated, that is separa­ted also; it is exquisite in sence, both by reason of the Nerves that are distributed in it, and that pass under it, sometimes it is double, and ma­ny times the excrements being thick and sticking to it like a crust, brings no small prejudice to the Hearing: It looks down right from an oblique Scituation, whereby it is safer from outward violence, and apter to re­ceive the image of voyce; it sticks firmly to the little bone which is called Mullens, and to the Cavity of the Orbita next to it, if you except but that part which toucheth the superior region of the passage of Hea­ring, for there the connexion is looser, so that the Membrane may be a little opened.

For in the superier and internal Cavity of the passage of Hearing, the provident Creator hath placed a Muscle intertexed with the Membrane growing to the skin, and this is seen not only in men grown up, but also continually in Infants, which here by its thin substance of fleshy fibrae [Page 72] growing narrower from a broad beginning, with a subtil Tendon tou­ching the Membrane of the Timpanum, is carried even to the Malleolus, that the Membrane being stretched a little outwards and upwards to­wards the superior part, the sound may be the righter taken and the bet­ter conveied to the innermost part of the Ear.

This Membrane being taken away, a large Cavity appears, which Hippocrates rightly calls Antrosa, by reason of the various Cavities into which it is diffused: Fallopius calls it Timpanum, because the Membrane is placed round about the edges of it, like a Drum-head: He that would view this accuratly, must first take away the three small bones placed in it; they are distitute of Membranes, and yet about their extremities, they are bound with a slender Ligament for their firmer nexure, the first of these from the likeness of its form they call Malleolus, it hath a round head from which by degrees it is attenuated, about the middle it is adorned with two processes, one of which is short, to which the in­ternal Muscle joyns it self; the other is longer but thinner, which lies upon the roundness of the Timpanum, the remainder of the little bone whether you compare it to a little foot or to a tail, its extremity being a little turned inwards, lightly turns the Membrane sticking to it, about the middle; its head is joyned to the Anvil placed to it, by such a nexure as is not very straight by reason of the loosness of the Ligament: It is more strongly joyned to the Membrane under it, for the safeguard and motion of which, the Moleolus is framed.

But seeing that to the exquisite transmission of sound, it is not sufficient to unfold the Membrane of the Timpanum, a little outwards, but also to consider the rest of the Dimensions; The wise Creator hath produced a Muscle, which is very little, but in exactness of all parts equal with the greatest, and hath secured it in a singular passage of the Os Petrosum: It takes its beginning like a Ligament, at what part the stony process is joyned to the Wedg-like Bone, and growing thicker by degrees, it pas­seth commonly with a double, sometimes with a single Tendon, to the shorter process of the Malleolus and its Neck, and therefore the bone be­ing moved inwards toward the forepart, it draws the Membrane of the Timpanum, which is annexed to it inwards also.

The other of the little Bones of Hearing, obtains the name of Anvil, and is of a thicker body; this hath a light Cavity, in which, the head of the Malleolus is received; as also two Processes, of which, the shorter leans to the hinder Cavity of the Timpanum, the other is longer, and is firmly, though loosly, bound by a Ligament to the head of the Stir­rop.

Also the third small Bone of the Timpanum is called Stapes, or a Stirrop, from its figure, it hath a round head, which, as we told you, was knit to the Anvill, it stretcheth out from its head two Cavities, and a little log bowed like a bow, with a very thin and porous Basis, least any thing should stop the passage of the sound; this answers in likeness to the cir­cumference of of the oval hole, to which it is bound with a loose bond, so that it may be driven within its Cavity but cannot be pulled out with­out violence, and these two small bones are formed for the Malleolus sake [Page 73] that they may conveniently underprop it and be observant to its moti­ons. To the Stirrop is added a fourth little bone, round and small, an­nexed to the Ligament of the Stirrop, which Francis Sylvius is said first to have found out.

Now the Cavity it self which is called Timpanum comes to view, and presents a various face to them that behold it, for it hath many Cavities and turnings, in which the violent conflux of air is diverted, and the refle­xion of the voyce hindred by its singular inequality; also it hath diverse pores and passages which transmit the images of sounds: above, where the shorter Process of the Anvil is, a large Den is opened, which by its smal Caverns opens a way into the inexplicable hollowness of the Dug-like Process: Beneath, and toward the fore part, there is a passage from the Timpanum to the Pallat, w ch is narrower toward the end by reason of the access of Cartilages, by which the sound being as it were stirred up in the mouth with the air, passeth to the Ear, so also the humidities against Nature are cast out by the pallat, and that is the reason such as are dull of hearing, hear better their mouths being open, and breathing restrai­ned, but when they yawn they are altogether deaf; and although the outward Ear be altogether stopped, yet they percive their own speech well enough; neither can any other reason be given, why the mouth and nostrils being stopped that Membrana of the Timpanum is turned out­ward with a sound, and if the violence be the greater it is hurt by it, and by this passage some will avoid the smoke of Tobacco which they take, out at their Ears: Also Alcmaeon held that Goats also breathed by their Ears, the air and what is mixed with it, so readily running from the Pallat to the Timpanum.

The middle of the antrous Cavity which sticks up like a little smooth hill, hath a hole on each side, of which, that which is greatest and shut with the thin and cleer Basis of the Stirrop, they call the Oval window; that which is less they call the Round window; the one deduceth the sound to the labirinth, the other to the beginning of the Cochlea; at the end of this, more small pores are seen.

The oval Window looks into another Cavity far less than the former, which by reason of its bony passages returning into the same Cavity, Fallopius calls the Labyrinth; its compass is round, and besides that oval hole which is over it, it hath four holes of its own which end in periods, and a fift which opens it self in the end of the broader circle of the Coch­lea: These the following Table sufficiently manifesteth, but the Laby­rinth whol with its circles and the Cochlea, the Table of the eight Chap­ter in the second, seventh, and eight Figure represents.

The Cochlea is a famous Cavity of the Ear, with two circles and a third portion bowed like a spoon; it is placed in the common rocky process, it is spermatical, dry, and light, of a substance fit to preserve the sound.

In these abstruse Cavities air is contained even from the very birth; to this hidden Organ of Hearing are small Veins and Arteries distributed from the internal and foremost branches of the Jugular Vein and Carotis Artery, but especially Nerves; for whereas a double portion of the fift [Page 74] pair is carried into the posterior passage of the Os Petrosum, or first hole of the Bone of the Temples, one is harder, which enters the hole called by the Ancients Caecum, and passeth the Skul, by a wreathed passage; the other is softer and divided from the former by a process in the bony pas­sage, this passeth by its greater part to the Centre of the Cochlea, by its les­ser to the circles of the Labyrinth; in both places it perfects the office of hearing: to these a singular branch from the fourth Conjugation adds its self, and passeth to the Timpanum, from the internal part of the Ear, from whence passing out it divides its self and partly joyns it self to the har­der portion of the fift pair, partly it is distributed to the Caverns of the Dug-like Process.

From this the Membranes have sence, and the internal Muscle its mo­tion, but in this part of the Organ of Hearing, if it be demanded which is chiefest and most necessary to hearing, we must make some distinction, for if we regard that part which retains the sound, and sends it to the in­ternal parts, the Cochlea will gain the preheminence, but if we search af­ter what is required to the perceiving of the sound received, the expan­sion of the soft Nerve placed in the circulation of the Cochlea will have the dignity.

After the Sences of Seeing and Hearing, there is no reason we should treat of the Organs of Smelling, Tasting, and Feeling, for the Nostrils are the Instruments of Smelling, the Bones and Muscles of which we treated of in the thirteeth Chapter, especially of the Nerves of Smel­ling in the fourteenth Chapter. The Tongue is the Organ of Tasting, of whose substance, Muscles, and Vessels, we writ copiously in the ele­venth Chapter: The Feeling is common to all the parts that have Nerves, or their Branches or Membranes, and hath no particular Organ of its own.

Place here the Table of the sixteenth Chapter, which hath the Number 20. at the corner of the brass Plate.

[Page]
AN EXPLANATION of the TABLE of the sixteenth CHAPTER.

This Table represents the external Ear with his Muscles and Cartilages, as also the inter­nal or chief Organ of Hearing, its Cavities, Bones, Passages and Nerves, as they are found out by Dissection of such Bodies as are grown up.

FIG. I. Shews the external Ear whol, with its muscles and Cavities.
  • AA The Helix of the Ear.
  • BB The Anthelix.
  • C The Tragus, or beard of the Ear.
  • D The Antitragus.
  • E The external lobe of the Ear.
  • FF The external Concha of the Ear.
  • GG The cavity between the Helices called Innominata.
  • H The muscle moving the Ear right upwards.
  • III The three-fold muscle with his tendon moving the Ear oblickly upwards, divided into so many parts.

FIG. II. Shews the external Ear conspi­cuous behind.
  • AA The skin with the Membrane stretched upwards and down­wards.
  • BB The Cartilage which makes the Ear.
  • C The hole for the passage of hea­ring.
  • D A portion of the Ligament of the external Ear.
  • E Part of the Lobus of the Ear.

FIG. III. Shews the fore part of the internal Ear.
  • A Part of the bone of the Temples containing the rocky process.
  • B The passage of hearing.
  • C The beginning of the passage or hive.
  • D The duglike process.
  • E The bodkinlike process broken off.

FIG. IV. The bone of the fore-going Figure is shewed, in which the passage of hearing is cut off, that so the mem­brane of the Timpanum may be seen.
  • AA The beginning of the passage of hearing.
  • BB The membrane of the Timpa­num.
  • C The little foot of the Malleus transparent by the membrane.
  • D The duglike process.
  • E The bodkinlike appendix.

FIG. V. Shews the Muscles of the in­ternal Ear.
  • A The muscle moving the mem­brane and Maleolus outwards.
  • B The membrane of the Timpanum.
  • CC The muscle moving the Malleo­lus and membrane inwards.
  • E The head of the Malleolus.

FIG. VI.
  • A Part of the passage of Hearing passing to the Timpanum.
  • BC The cavity of the Timpanum, in which
  • B The oval hole.
  • C The round hole.

FIG. VII Shews the rocky process with the smal bones of the Timpanum in their scituation.
  • A The Malleolus.
  • B The Anvil.
  • C The superior part of the stirrop conspicuous.
  • DD The bowing of the Cochlea.

FIG. 7. Shews the three small bones out of their scituation.
  • A The Malleolus with its two pro­cesses, its short and long.
  • B The Anvil applied to the Mal­leolus.
  • C The Stirrop.
  • D The small bone joyned to the Li­gament of the stirrop.

FIG. VIII. Shews the inferior face of the bone of the Temples.
  • AA The extremity of a quil thrust through that passage of Hearing which is carried to the pallat.
  • BB Shews the same passage broke off from the next part.

FIG. IX.
  • AA The cavity of the Cochlea, whose broader part goes to the La­byrinth.
  • BB The cavity of the Labyrinth, in which the oval hole is conspicuous: also four other holes which open themselves in the circles are obum­brated by a black colour: the fift in the extremity of the circle of the Cochlea, is broken off. If you would see how they are in Infants, look the first Table of the eighth Chapter, the seventh figure.

FIG. X.
  • AA The beginning of the passage of the first hole of the bone of the Tem­ples, into which the Nerve of Hea­ring passeth.
  • BB The rocky process of the bone of the Temples, in which the cavities are contained.

FIG. XI.
  • ABCD The end of the passage in­to which the Nerve of Hearing proceeds laid open, the bone being taken away.
  • B The cavity in which the softer portion of the Nerve of Hearing lies in the Centre of the Cochlea.
  • C The process between each portion of the Nerve standing up like a bridg.
  • D Another cavity called Caecum by the Ancients, Aquaeductus by Fal­lopius, by which the harder portion of the nerve of hearing obliquely descends.
  • EE Two footsteps of the circles in the Labyrinth, which you may see whol, Chap. 8. Table 1. fig. 7, 8.

FIG. XII. Contains a portion of the bone of the Temples, in which the Timpa­num being taken away, and the passage which contains the Nerve of Hearing there appears.
  • AA The softer portion of the nerve of Hearing.
  • BB The harder portion of the nerve of Hearing, obliquely descending under the Timpanum, being thic­ker about the place it goes out.
  • CC A small Nerve from the fourth pair joyning it self to the harder nerve of Hearing.
[Page]

CHAP. 17. Of the Bones of the Extream Parts.

FRom the Trunk of the Body of Man we come to his Limbs, from the Middle Parts to the Extream, to the contemplation of the Hands and Feet, both by the Order of Nature and of Dissection. These are the Supporters of the whol Body, the other the Stewards and Storers of it; The Limbs have strong Bones, stout Muscles, and very many Vessels, for their Life, Nourishment, and Motion sake.

The Bones which are commonly assigned to the Hand, are the Shoul­ders, Cubits, and such as are proper to the extremity of the Hand; the Bones of the Shoulder, are, the Claviculae and Scapulae.

The Claviculae make one Bone on each side, fistulous and thick, more bowed in Men than they are in Women: One of the Extremities of it is joyned to the Sternum, the other with the superior Process of the Sca­pula, where it produceth the Acromium or the top of the Shoulder: Its nexure is loose, but with a very stout Ligament and strengthned with Cartilages.

The Bone called Scapula is broad, and thin; not so much for the defence of the Costals of the Back, over which it lies like a Buckler, as for the safe articulation or joynting of the Clavicula and Shoulder: It is in form triangular, by its longest side stretched out in the Basis, with which the other two being unequal in length, make two angles, the one supe­rior, the other inferior: It is hollow within, gibbous without. It sends forth a threefold Process, of which, one toucheth the top of the Shoul­der, and is called the Spine of the Scapula, by reason of its figure: It is knit to the Claricula: The other is lower and less, not much unlike a Ra­vens Bill, and therefore called Coracoides: The third is shorter, within whose Cavity the head of the Shoulder with its Cartilage is hid. To these come their proper additions, as singular Ligaments by which the Scapula is joyned to the head of the Shoulder, and also to the Clavicula; these are in number reputed to be five, the first of which is broader than the rest, and springs from the shorter Process encompassing the whol joynt, and is strongly fastened to the first and internal region of the head of the Shoulder: The second is famous for strength, produced from the external side of the Process Coracois, and is inserted inwardly in­to the Acromium. The third Ligament is round, and takes its original externally from the Process Coracois, and ends internally in the head of the Shoulder. The fourth begins above from the Neck of the Scapula; and joyns it self externally to the head of the Shoulder. The fifth hath [Page 76] the same beginning with the former, and ends behind about the exter­nal head of the Shoulder; and these Ligaments as they regard the strength of the Shoulder, so the third, fourth, and fifth, are fitted to re­ceive the Tendons of the Muscles.

We come now to the Bone of the Shoulder which is large and strong: It hath a great head defended with a Cartilage above: It hath a cleft be­fore, into which the Tendinous beginning of the Muscle Biceps descends for its greater safeguard and strength; it is knit to the Scapula by Diar­throsis, or articulation; the Shoulder is globous before, depressed be­hind: the superior part of the Shoulder hath alwaies a manifest Appen­dix, to the inferior part sticks out with two Processes especially, of which the external gives beginnings to the Muscles of the Metacarpus and those that extend the fingers; at the other, those of the Wrest, and those that bow the Fingers have their beginning: To these comes ano­ther Prominence outwards, for the more commodious bowing of the Radius: Here are two Cavities, behold of which, the foremost is least, the hindmost greatest, about which the Arm is turned. The Cubitus is composed of a double Bone, which are joyned together at the Extremi­ty, but separated in the middle, where notwithstanding they are joyned by a Membranous Ligament, that the motion might be the readier, and also that the Muscles might be the safer.

The first bone of the Cubitus is called Ʋlna because it is often used to measure things with, for of old, it was only called Os Cubiti, as the Bone of the Shoulder was called the Arm; this is larger than the other, and longer, and attenuated by degrees from the Back; above, it hath two Processes, one which is less and more acute, which is the foremost; the greater is more obtuse, which is the hindmost, and by the Ancients is called Ancon and Olecranon. Two Cavities are to be added to these, of which, the exterior and lesser receives the head of the Radius: The o­ther is larger and semicircular, by which the Ʋlna is joyned to the Shoul­der by that articulation which the Greeks call Ginglymos: the inferior part of the Ʋlna ends in a round knob, which is called Styloides, and by the intervening of Cartilages is knit by a ligament to the Bones of the Wrest.

The other Bone of the Cubitus is called Radius, and is the higher in Si­tuation and the shorter, and having a round head, is received by the Ʋl­na, although by a singular Cavity it receive the Bone of the Shoulder; at the other extremity is thicker and by a lesser Cavity receives the Ʋlna, by a greater the Bone of the Wrest.

The Hand is divided into three parts, Carpus, Metacarpus, and the Fin­gers: The Carpus or Wrest is formed of eight small Bones, something different the one from the other, both in magnitude and form; four of these are placed beneath, so many are joyned to the Bones of the Meta­carpus by Synarthrosis; four are superior, of which, three are joyned to the Cubitus and Radius, they are joyned by a Cartilaginous Ligament, and by another Transverse one, which as it defends the Bones of the Wrest, so it constrains the Tendons of the Muscles to stretch out the Fingers.

The Metacarpus is composed of four Bones, long and slender, and dis­joyned in the middle, that so the Muscles may lie the safer between the Bones, and their waight may not hinder the agility of the Hand: they have broad Apendices beneath, into the Cavities of which the Bones of the Wrest pass; the superior are round, that they may the better re­ceive the orders of the Fingers.

Fifteen Bones, which are diverse in respect of magnitude, make up the Fingers, if you reckon the Thumb and all, for the first in the Fin­gers is larger than the second, and the second than the third, which is covered with the Nail; externally they are all round, internally plain, that so we might grasp sollid things the easier: beneath they have broad Processes, in the Cavity of which they receive others; above they have round Processes received within the Cavities of o­thers.

The Foot makes up the other Extream part, under which common name is comprehended the Thigh, Leg, and that which is commonly cal­led the Foot. The Bone of each Thigh is but one, but in strength and bigness second to none, because it is to sustain the whol bulk of the Bo­dy; it is round before, but something compressed behind, and hath a rough thing like a line, stretched obliquely towards the lower part for the more ready commission of the knees: It hath famous Appendices both above and beneath, joyned to its Processes; the superior Appendix joyned to its Process is large, and makes the globous head of the Thigh, having a strong Neck which passeth into the Cavity of the Os Ischium, Ili­um, and Pubis (which some call the Funnel, others the Box:) It is kept in this Cavity with stout Ligaments, one is broad and Membranous, which compasseth about the whol joynt, the other is round which is produced from the Cavity its self, and presently received in the Head: under the neck of the Thigh are two Processes beheld, and they are en­creased by their Apendices, of which, the external is called Trochanter or Rotator major, conspicuous with its Cavity and properlines; the other or internal which designs the figure of the blunt knob, is called Trochanter or Rotator minor. Each of them hath a strong and safe insertion, a stable beginning and strong Muscles. The inferior Appendix of the Thigh waxing thick by degrees with his process is placed in the Cavities of the Tibia, with a double Protuberance like two large Heads; the Cavity as it is light before, so behind it is very notable, by which large vessels with the great Nerve of the fourth pair, is carried to the Legs: behind, Nature hath placed two Bones called Sesamoides to the inferior Appen­dices of the Thigh, which defend the beginnings of the Muscle called Gasterocnemius in its motion.

Before in the Joynt of the Thigh with the Tibia is the Mola, which also is called Patella, a short round Bone, sticking to the Tendons of the Mus­cles which extend the Leg, from a Cartilaginous substance it grows to the sollidity of a Bone by degrees: It is plain without, gibbous within and covered with a Cartilaginous crust; its nexure is loose that so it may avoid luxation the better, and yet it is no help at all to the motion of the Muscles.

The Leg like the Cubit is composed of two Bones, much differing both in thickness and strength; they are disjoyned in the middle, and have a strong Ligament between, and give security to the Muscles that move the Feet.

The first and chiefest of these is called Tibia: It is large, strong, and by reason of the variety of its sides almost triangular, of which, the fore­most towards the internal side is altogether destitute of flesh, and makes an acute angle or Spine. It hath Appendices different in magnitude, of which, the superior is famous in largeness, diducted behind into two heads, on the top with long Cavities it receives the hollow inferior Apen­dix of the Thigh: in the middle between the knobs ariseth a strong Liga­ment, which makes the articulation strong, & this is helped both by that Membranous Ligament which is wrapped about the whol Joynt, and by other particular ones, both before and on the sides. The inferior Apen­dix of the Tibia is less, and yet it hath a notable Process sticking out on the internal side of the Foot, which is called the internal Ancle: It hath also diverse Cavities, one lateral, to which the Fibula passeth, and two others distinguished by a light Protuberance which is under the Ancle: as it is above committed to the Thigh, so it is below committed to the Ancle by Gynglymos.

The other Bone of the Leg is called Fibula, and it is equal in length to the Tibia, but it is smaller and weaker by ods, from a thick back grow­ing thin by degrees: It makes a light Cavity above by its round Apen­dix, to which the external bounch of the Tibia is joyned, and it sends a manifest Process to the outside of the Foot, which is called the external Ancle-bone, and defends the Nexus of the Talus with the Tibia.

We come now to the Bones of the extremity of the Foot, which like those of the Hands, are divided into three parts, Tarsus, Metatarsus, and the Toes: The Bones of the Tarsus are seven, which differ mightily both in bigness and figure.

The first of them is called Talus, or Astragalus, and conduceth more to the motion of the Foot than the rest: It hath a large head and lightly sinuous, that it may be the better fitted to the Tibia, comprehended on both sides by the Ancles, it is joyned to the Ancles and the Bones of the Tarsus by various and strong Ligaments before by a prominence with the Bone called Cymbiformis; underneath partly it sticks out and partly hath Cavities, and is joyned to the Calcaneus.

The Calcaneus, Calx, or Heel-bone is the second Bone of the Tarsus, ex­celling the rest both in bigness and strength, it is long and stretched out toward the hinder part, that a man might stand the firmer and not easily fall backwards, it is unequal with knobs, for the more firm nexure of the Tendons of the Muscles extending the Feet. It hath Cavities on the sides that it might give descent to the Tendons, especially on the in­side by which both Tendons and Vessels are carried to the Feet: into the Calcaneum are Ligaments transversly inserted from each Ancle, under which the Tendons of the Muscles pass safely to move the Toes, as it is joyned to the Bone called Cymbiformis before, so above it is joyned by strong Ligaments to the Talus.

The Third Bone of the Tarsus is called Cymbiformis, or Naviculare, see­ing it is carried as it were from the broader hinder part of the Hip to the Narrower fore part, by a crooked passage; here by a Cavity it re­ceives the Talus, and is again received by the Wedg-like Bones.

Three Bones make up the rest of the Tarsus, to which the Ancients gave no names. Fall [...]pius calls them Sphenoidea, or Wedglike; of these, the first exceeds the third, and the third the second in magnitude

The second part of the Foot is called Metatarsus, and consists of five Bones, unequal both in length and thickness, yet are they strong and disjoyned in the midst and give safety to the Muscles; they are thicker where they are joyned to the Tarsus, slenderer afterwards; at last being encreased by Processes, they receive the heads of the Toes in their Cavities.

The Bones of the Toes are fourteen, of which, those two of the great Toe are bigger and stronger than the rest; the other Toes have three apiece, much about the bigness of the Bones of the Fingers.

The Bones called Sesamoida, remain yet to be spoken to, so called be­cause in bigness and compressed roundness they are like the seeds Sesa­mus. From their first original they are Cartilaginous, and grow sollid by age: Their bigness is various by reason of the Bones they stick to. They usually account twelve of them to be in the Fingers, and as many in the Toes, but usually there is fewer. They stick to the Joynts un­der the Fingers fastened to the Ligaments, and defend not only the Ten­dons, but also the Joynts.

But seeing that in the following Table you have an elegant Sceleton, or the joynings of the Bones of the whol Body, it were well worth the while to shew their nexures in a few words. The nexure of the Bones regards either Rest or Motion; such as regard Rest, are called Symphysis; and this is done either immediately, or by means of another Body.

That which is performed immediately is done three waies; of which, the first is Rhaphe, or Sutura, when they are so joyned as though they were sewed together as the Bones of the Skull. The second is Harmo­nia, or a connexure by a line as in most of the Bones of the upper Jaw. The third is Gomphosis, and is as when a Nail is stuck in a board, and so the Teeth are fastened in their Cavities.

Also the union that is made by means of another Body is done three waies. The first is called Synchondrosis, which is performed by the in­tervening of Cartilages; and such are the Bones of the Sternum, Pubis, and many others. The second is Synneurosis, which is done by the inter­vening of Nervous parts and Ligaments, whether they be round or di­lated into Membranes. The third is called Syssarcosis, which is a nexure by Flesh, as the Muscles about the Shoulder and Thigh, and the Gums about the Teeth.

The connexure which regards the motion of the Bones is called Arthron, or Articulation, and is divided into Diarthrosis, or Dearticulation, and Synarthrosis, or Coarticulation. Diarthrosis is a connexure of Bones, pre­pared for evident, strong, and easie motion, as in the Arms, Hands, [Page 180] Thighs and Feet. Synarthrosis is a connexure of Bones, in which moti­on is more obscure, weak, and difficult: both of these kinds of Articu­lations consists in three Manners.

The first of these is called Enarthrosis, namely when the Cavity re­ceiving is deep, and the head received into it long, and this is seen in the Thigh with the Acetabulum, and in the Astragalus, with the Bone called Cymbiforme.

The second is called Arthrodia in which the Cavity is light and the head committed to it short and depressed; such is between the hinder part of the head and the first Joynt of the Neck, between the inferior Jaw and the Bone of the Temples, the Ribs with the Vertebrae, and the Cartilages of the Ribs with the Sternum, the Bones of the Carpus with the Metacarpus, and the Bones of the Tarsus with the Metatarsus.

The third is called Gynglimus, in which, Bones are so joyned that the head of one passeth into the Cavity of another, and in like manner his head into his Cavity, and so Hippocrates thought the Vertebrae were joy­ned on the hinder part, so the Ʋlna is joyned with the Shoulder, and the Thigh with the Tibia, the Tibia with the Astragalus, and the Astraga­lus with the Calcaneus.

Place here the Table of the seventeenth Chapter, which hath the Number 21. at the corner of the brass Plate.

An EXPLANATION of the TABLE of the seventeenth Chapter.

This Table exactly presents the Bones of Man to your view, so that the Composition of the Bones we mentioned before in the Abdomen, Breast, and Head are here seen, especially the Bones of the Hands and Feet are seen both before and behind; also the Ligaments of the Thigh and Tibia; lastly, the Bones called Sesamoides are curiously represented.

FIG. I. Shews the Sceleton of a Body grown up.
  • AA The internal fide of each Sca­pula.
  • BB Both the Claviculae.
  • CC The bone of the shoulder, other­wise called the bone of the arm.
  • aa The head of the shoulder produ­duced from the appendix.
  • bb The external bunch of each shoulder.
  • cc The internal bunch of the shoul­der.
  • DD The bone of the Cubit called Radius.
  • EE The bone of the Cubit called Ulna.
  • FF The eight bones of the Carpus.
  • GG The thumb composed of three bones.
  • HH The Metacarpus composed of four bones.
  • II The four fingers composed of three bones.
  • KK The thigh which some call Crus.
  • LL The Mola, or Knee-pan.
  • dd The head of the bone of the thigh, or superior appendix.
  • ee The neck of the bone of the thigh.
  • ff Trochanter, or Rotator major.
  • gg Trochanter, or Rotator minor.
  • hh The appendix, or inferior head of the thigh.
  • MM The Tibia.
  • NN The Fibula.
  • ii The internal ancle.
  • kk The external ancle.
  • OO The seven bones of the Tarsus conspicuous before.
  • PP The five bones of the Metatar­sus.
  • QQ The bones of the toes, of which the great toe hath two, and the rest three apiece.
  • ** &c. The appendices of the shoul­der, Radius, Thigh, Tibia, distin­guished by a small line from the rest of the bone.

FIG. II. Contains the Scapula with the Cla­vicula, to which the bones of the Shoulder, Cubit, and Hand are joyned.
  • A The left Clavicula, in which
  • a The head which is lightly sinewous where it is committed to the Ster­num.
  • b The other extremity of the Clavi­cula, whereby it is joyned to the process of the Scapula.
  • B The Scapula.
  • c The short process of the Scapula receiving the shoulder.
  • d The process of the Scapula called Coracois.
  • e The process of the Scapula called Spina.
  • f The superior angle.
  • g The inferior angle.
  • hh The basis of the Scapula.
  • C The notable hinder bone of the shoulder.
  • f The greater or backward cavity of the bone of the shoulder.
  • g The crooked process of the bone of the Ulna.
  • D The bone Ulna.
  • E The Radius.
  • F The external face of the Wrest.
  • G The Metacarpus consisting of four bones.
  • H The Thumb consisting of three bones.
  • II The orders of the fingers.

FIG. III. Contains the eight bones of the Wrest expressed largely, that so they might be the better distinguished.
  •  

FIG. IV. Shews the Os Ischium, Illium, and Pubis, and under them, the thigh leg, and Foot.
  • A The external face of the Os Ilium
  • B The Acetabulum which receives the head of the thigh.
  • C The thigh conspicuius behind, in which
  • a The superior appendix.
  • b Trochanter major.
  • ▵ The rough line of the thigh.
  • c Trochanter minor.
  • d The posterior cavity of the infe­rior appendix.
  • ee The heads of the inferior appen­dix.
  • f The protuberances distinguishing the cavities of the Tibia.
  • D The Tibia conspicuous behind.
  • g The internal ancle.
  • E The Fibula.
  • h The external ancle.
  • ** The appendices of the Tibia.
  • F The Tarsus.
  • G The Metatarsus.
  • H The great toe consisting of two bones.

FIG. V. Propounds the bones of the Tarsus distinctly, in which
  • A Os Astragali.
  • B Os Calcanei.
  • C Os Cymbiforme.
  • D Os Cubiforme.
  • EEE The three other Wedlike bones

FIG. VI. Shew the four greater and four lesser bones called Sesamoides.
  •  

FIG. VII. Shews the superior part of the thigh with the Acetabulum.
  • aa A broad Ligament compassing the joynt of the thigh dissected.
  • b A round Ligament arising out of the Acetabulum.

FIG. VIII. The inferior part of the Thigh and superior part of the Leg is shewed.
  • a A broad Ligament compassing the Joynt.
  • b A Ligament produced out of the Sepiment.
  • cc The cavities of the Tibia re­ceiving the thigh.
  • d The knee-pan with a portion of the tendon joyned to it.
[Page]

CHAP. 18. Of the Muscles of the Hands.

THE Hands, seeing they are the famous Instruments of admira­ble Works, cannot want both various and strong Muscles; the greatest part of which, together with those that are referred to the Feet, better deserve the names of Muscles than those which we have hitherto shewed about the Breast, Abdomen, Back, and Head; [Page] [Page 181] therefore that they may not want their vulgar distinction wherein they are distinguished into Head, Belly and Tail, being something like Mice or Lizards if you take away their Feet: we must take the beginning of the Muscle for the head, that part to w ch the contraction is made for the tail, the end of the Muscle, or that thin and Nervous part by which it moves; for the belly, the middle part of the Muscle, which is more swelled by reason of Flesh.

The Tendines of these move admiration almost, being famous in strength, and cleer in colour; and although we call it the tail of the Muscle, yet is it properly a Spermatical part stretched along the length of the Muscle, which being before scattered in Fibrae, is now gathered together, and being endewed with Spirit by the Nerves, moves the part it is inserted into by contracting it.

The Muscles of the Hand, pertain, some to the Shoulder, some to the Cubit, and some to the Hand it self. The Muscles called Deltoides, lift up the Shoulder, called so from its form, being large and fleshy; it ariseth from a broad beginning from the middle Clavicula, the top of the Shoulder or Acromium, and it is fastened into the midst of the Shoulder with a strong Tendon: Also the Muscle which proceeds from the Pro­cess of the Scapula called Coracois, helps to perform this office. It hath a long fleshy body, and is inserted about the middle of the inner part of the Shoulder. The Pectoral Muscle which we spake of in his proper place, draws the Shoulder to the Breast, and the broadest of the Back draws it back again, of both which we spake in the twelfth Chapter.

The Muscle called Rotundus major depresseth the Shoulder; it is of a fleshy thick body: It ariseth from the inferior angle of the Scapula, and is inserted into the Shoulder neer the Tendon of the Pectoral Muscle. Also the Muscle called Rotundus minor depresseth the Shoulder, and if you heed their nexure, it is but a certain portion of the former: it ari­seth from the inferior angle of the Scapula, and from a round belly be­comes slenderer, and ends in the Neck of the Shoulder.

Three Muscles seem to compass the Shoulder about; of which, two are placed above the Scapula, three beneath it: the first of the Supra­scapulars, arising from the Basis of the Scapula, above the Process called Spiniformis, is carried foreward with a strong Tendon and knit to the fift Ligament of the Shoulder. The second arising from the Basis of the Scapula under the Spina, being fleshy and thick ends with a short and broad Tendon in that Ligament of the Shoulder which is called the fourth. The Infrascapularis is carried from the inferior side of the Basis of the Scapulae, being fleshy and broad and ends in the third Ligament of the Shoulder,

The Cubit is bowed by two Muscles placed before; of which, the first is called Biceps from his double beginning; from its figure it is called, a Fish: it ariseth partly from the Funnel of the Scapula, partly from the Process Coracois, and descends into the superior head of the Radius, with a round but strong Tendon. The other of the bowing Muscles is called Brachiaeus; this lies under the former: it takes its beginning a­bout the middle of the Shoulder, and being dilated downwards with a [Page 182] fleshy end, it concludes as well in the Ligament of the Joynt, as in the Appendix of the Ʋlna and Radius.

The Cubit is extended by two other Muscles called Postici, of which, the first and longer is composed of a double beginning; one high about the Neck of the Scapula, the other low under the head of the Shoulder; under the Tendon of the broadest Muscle of the Back; it is broad with­in, and ends outwardly in the top of the Cubit: The second extender is shorter and ariseth about the middle of the Shoulder, and being joyned to the former it ends outwardly on the top of the Cubit. To these Ex­tenders the Muscle called Anconeus is joyned, being of a very smal body, arising behind from the inferior part of the Shoulder, and des­cends a little obliquely into the side of the Ʋlna between the two Bones of the Cubit.

To move the Radius are four Muscles produced, of which, two which are commonly called Pronatores, turn the Radius inwards; the o­ther two are called Supinatores, and move it outwards. The first of the Pronati is square in form, rising transversly from the internal side of the Ʋlna, and is committed to the internal part of the Radius. The second is called Teres from its round body produced from the internal bunch of the Shoulder, and passeth obliquely almost to the middle of the Radius.

The first of the Supinati which is the longer, takes its beginning high­er above the external bunch of the Shoulder, and sending down a Mem­branous Tendon passeth to the inferior Appendix of the Radius: the o­ther is shorter and thin, arising below about the Ligament of the Shoul­der, and ends neer the middle of the Radius.

Four Muscles are assigned to the Wrest, although three of them come even to the Metacarpus: two of these are bowers and as many extenders of the bowers of the Wrest by reason of their difference of Scituation: the one is called internal, the other external; both of them arise from the internal knob of the Shoulder: The internal passeth to the fourth Bone of the Wrest, the external to the Bone of the Metacarpus that pas­seth to the fore-finger.

The internal of the extending Muscles, descending from the exter­nal knob of the Shoulder, is carried to the bone of the Metacarpus which is subject to the little finger. The external Extending Muscle, arising above the external bunch of the Shoulder, is fastned often times with a double Tendon, into the first and second Bone of the Metacarpus.

To the palm of the Hand is referred the Muscle called Palmarius, by means of which the wrinkling of the skin is the better performed. It takes its beginnig from the internal bunch of the Shoulder, and stret­cheth out a Membranous Tendon by the Palm of the Hand, even to the confines of the Fingers, the fleshy Membrane again unfolds the skin being wrinkled by this Muscle.

The Fingers of the Hand requires various motion and strength, and therefore various Muscles with strong Tendons, bow them, extend them, and turn them to the sides. Of the bowing Muscles, some are sub­servient to more Fingers than one, some only to the Thumb: Those [Page 183] that are subservient to more, are those that are dedicated to the motion of the first, second, and third Internodii, of the four Fingers, (I do not know what English word to give Internodium, it signifies the space be­tween one Joynt and another) that which bows the second Internodium takes its beginning from the internal knob of the Shoulder, and toward the end is divided into four Tendons, which pass into the second Bones of the Fingers: The Muscle bowing the third Internodium, takes its be­ginning from the internal bunch of the Shoulder, and the foremost Pro­cess of the Ʋlna, and with four strong Tendons proceeds to the third Bones of the Fingers. The bowers of the first Internodium of the Fingers, by reason of its thin and round Body is called Lumbricalis, and ariseth from the Membranes of the Tendons of the foregoing Muscle, and is ex­ternally inserted in the first bone of the Fingers.

The Thumb because it hath a singular strength above the rest of the Fingers, hath diverse bowers: Two Muscles bow its first Internodium, which take their beginning from the annular Ligament of the Wrest and the Bone subject to the Thumb, and end in the first Bone of the Thumb: Three or four bowers move the second Internodium which are but short, yet fleshy; they arise from the bones of the Metacarpus which sustain the fore, middle, and Ring-finger, and end in the second Bone of the Thumb: The bower of the third bone is but one, but that one is very strong; this takes its beginning from the Ʋlna, where it receives the head of the Radius, passeth to the third Internodium of the Thumb with a strong Tendon; and these are the Muscles which bow the Hands.

The stretchers out of the second and third Internodii of the Fingers, are held to be two, though indeed they seem to be but one Muscle, for both of them rise from the external bunch of the Shoulder, and are exquisitly joyned in their progress, their tendons being united, and knit to the second and third Bones of the Fingers, having neither difference in body nor office. The interosseal Muscles extend the first Internodium of the Fingers, of which more by and by.

The Thumb as it hath two bowers, so hath it two singular extenders, one of which rising from the exterior side of the Cubitus, ascends even to the third Internodium of the Thumb; the other coming from the like beginning, passeth by a superior portion to a bone of the Wrest under the Thumb, by an inferior portion to the first and second Internodium of the Thumb, and also further.

Besides these motions the Fingers are disjoyned, and then again joy­ned, six Muscles perform this office, of which, Authors call the three external Interosseal, being placed between the Bones of the Metacarpus; these rising up between the sides of the Fingers internally and externally, stretch their Tendons even to the first, second, and third internodium, to which two Muscles of a like office come, and are as auxiliaries to them, from the first and last bone of the Metacarpus.

The fore Finger hath singular Abductors, and so hath the little Finger. The Abductor of the fore Finger is more rightly called Indicator: It pro­ceeds from the middle of the Cubit, and passeth frequently with a dou­ble [Page 184] body and Tendon, to the first Internodium both of the fore and mid­dle Finger, and yet sometimes it terminates in the bone of the Metacar­pus, which regards the fore Finger. The Abductor of the little Finger proceeding from the fourth bone of the Wrest passing by the Palm of the Hand, is externally inserted into the first Internodium. The Thumb hath its proper Adductor and Abductor, received in its first Internodium: the Abductor takes its original from the little bone of the Wrest joyned to the Thumb; the other from the bone of the Metacarpus, which sustains the fore Finger; yet here by reason of its firm nexure by its Tendinous Body, to the first bone of the fore Finger it seems to draw the fore Fin­ger to the Thumb.

Place here the Table of the eighteenth Chapter, which hath the Number 22. at the corner of the brass Plate.

AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE OF THE EIGHTEENTH CHAPTER.

This Table comprehends the Muscles which move the Shoulder, Cubit, and Hand: of which the greater part stick to their beginnings and ends.

FIG. I.
  • A Musculus Deltoides separated from the beginning
  • B Infrascapularis separated.
  • C Rotundus minor.
  • D Rotundus major.
  • E The pectoral muscle separated from the breast, vide Chap. IX.
  • F The fleshy portion of the broadest muscle of the back, vide Chap. XII.
  • G Musculus Biceps.
  • H The lesser muscle lifting up the shoulder in his Scituation.
  • II The Brachiaeus under the Biceps.
  • K The muscle Palmaris hanging from its original.
  • L A portion of the Supinator.
  • M The external bower of the Wrest.
  • N The internal bower of the Wrest.
  • O The bower of the second Internodium of the fin­gers.
  • P The bower of the third Internodium of the fin­gers.
  • Q The bowers of the first Internodium of the thumb in their first scituation.
  • R The bowers of the second Internodium of the thumb in their scituation.
  • S The Abductor of the little finger.
  • aa The internal face of the Scapula.
  • b The tendon of the muscle Palmaris.
  • c A portion of the tendon which bows the third Internodium of the thumb.
  • d The Ligament of the Wrest in its scituation.

FIG. II.
  • A The lesser muscle lifting up the shoulder.
  • B The muscle Brachiaeus whol.
  • C The round Pronator of the Radius.
  • D The bower of the third Internodium of the thumb out of his scituation.
  • E The square Pronator of the Radius.
  • F The bowers of the first Internodium of the thumb out of their scituation.
  • G The bowers of the second Internodium of the thumb out of their scituation.
  • aa The internal side of the Scapula.
  • b Os Humeri.
  • c Os Radii.
  • d Os Ulnae.
  • ee The membranous Ligament of the Ulna and Radius.
  • ffff The muscles commonly called Adductors.
  • h The Abductor of the little finger.

FIG. III.
  • A The first Suprascapularis removed out of his place.
  • B The second Suprascapularis.
  • C Rotundus minor.
  • D Rotundus major.
  • E The long muscle extending the Cubit.
  • F The short extender of the Cubit.
  • G The internal extender of the wrest.
  • H The external extender of the wrest, having here but one tendon.
  • I The special Abductor of the fore finger with but one tendon.
  • K The extendors of the second and third Interno­dij of the fingers united.
  • L The extendor of the third Internodium of the thumb.
  • M The extendor of the first Internodium of the thumb, having here but one single body and tendon.
  • aa The process of the Scapula called Spiniformis.
  • ae The muscle Anconeus.
  • bb The bone of the shoulder.
  • c The external knob of the shoulder.
  • d The internal knob of the shoulder.
  • e The tendines which extend the second and third Internodium gathered together.
  • ff &c. The tendons of the same muscles applying to the Internodij.
  • g The annular Ligament of the wrest loosed.

FIG. IV.
  • A The external face of the Scapula.
  • B The bone of the shoulder covered with the Pe­riostinum.
  • C Os Radij.
  • D Os Ulnae.
  • E The muscle of the Radius called Supinator lon­gus.
  • F The muscle of the Radius called Supinator bre­vis.
  • G The muscle Anconeus.
  • H The membranous Ligament of the Radius and Ulna.
  • IIII The three interosseal muscles with their Auxi­liary.
  • K The Abductor of the thumb.

FIG. V.
  • A The muscle bowing the second Internodium of the fingers called Perforans.
  • aa &c. Their tendons.
  • B The muscle bowing the third internodium of the fingers called Perforans.
  • bb Its tendines passing through the clefts of the ten­dines of the former.
  • CCCC The muscles bowing the first Internodium, or Lumbricals.
  • DD The bowers of the thumb in their scitua­tion.
  • cc A portion of the tendon bowing the third in­ternodium of the thumb.
[Page]

CHAP. 19. Of the Muscles of the Foot.

FOR the readiness of going, the Foot is aided with various Muscles; part of which, fit the Thigh and Leg, and part, the Foot it self with various motions. The Muscles which bow the Thigh are called Psoas, Iliacus internus, also the Triceps and Lividus.

The Psoas takes its beginning about the two inferior Vertebrae of the Breast, and the three superior of the Loyns, and descends obliquely to the lesser rotation of the Thigh, The internal Iliack ariseth from the internal face of the Os Ilium, and its Tendon being joyned with the for­mer, it terminates with it. The Muscle called Triceps is famous amongst the rest for its bigness, it ariseth from the Coxendix and Os Pubis, with a three-fold beginning, and is inserted below into the rough line of the Thigh. The Lividus is produced from the commissure of the Bones of the Pubis, and inserted into the internal side of the Thigh by a short Tendon.

Three Muscles extend the Thigh which are called Glutaei, and also prepared by the providence of the Almighty for the better accommoda­tion of the sitting, and the safeguard of the Joynt Ischium: of these, that which is called Glutaeus major, being stretched from the brim of the Ilium, Os Sacrum, and Coccix, it ends under the great Rotator of the Thigh. Glu­taeus medius ariseth from the Os Ilium under the former, and is fastened with a strong Tendon into the same Rotator: the lesser Glutaeus ariseth below from the Os Ilium, and descends to the superior part of the grea­ter Rotator. These three, though short, yet fleshy and strong Muscles, as they extend the Thigh, so the Muscle Triceps before mentioned, moves the Thigh inwards, whereby we climb the Masts of Ships and Trees, and sit firmly on a Horse.

There move the Thigh about the Muscle called Pyriformis, otherwise called the external Iliack, the external and internal Obturator, to which a fourth is added. The Pyriformis rising below from the Os Sacrum, is transversly inserted behind with a round Tendon into the greater Rota­tor. The external Obturator ariseth from the external compass of the hole, which is commonly accounted the original of the Bones of the Pubis, and passing transversly is received in the Cavity of the great Rota­tor. The internal Obturator, ariseth from the internal Circumference of the aforesaid hole, and with a four-fold collection of Tendons, though with a single fleshy habit, it passeth to the place the former did; for its safeguard sake it is sent through a fleshy substance like a purse. A fourth is added to these, which arising from the external knob of the Os Ilium, and the Appendix of the Ischium proceeds to the hinder part of the great Rotator.

The Tibia is extended by four Muscles, Membranosus, Rectus, Vastus ex­ternus, and internus. The Membranous muscle arising before from the brim of the Os ilium, with a smal and fleshy body, afterwards compas­sing the Thigh about on every side with a broad and membranous Ten­don. It is inserted into the Tibia and Fibula under the Knee. The right muscle descending from the internal knob of the Os ilium, includes the Knee with a broad and strong Tendon, and terminates in the Tibia. Vastus externus is so called from its bulk, it descends from the great Ro­tator of the Thigh outwardly, and mixing its large Tendon with the former, it ends in the same place with it. Vastus internus takes its begin­ning from the neck and lesser Rotator of the Thigh, and is united to the two former by a membranous Tendon, and is knit internally under the Knee-pan. To these extenders of the Tibia they ad the muscle called Crureus, which sticks to the Thigh as the Brachiaeus doth to the Arm; its original is taken between the two Rotators of the Thigh, and it unites its Tendons with the Muscles called Vasti.

The Musculus Subpoplitius moves the Tibia obliquely, which being pro­duced from the Ligament of the Knee before, ends obliquely in the su­perior Appendix of the Tibia.

There bow the Tibia the muscles called Fascialis, or Sartorius, Gracilis, Seminervosus, Semimembranus and Biceps. The Fascialis descends frOm the foremost Appendix of the Os ilium, with a long and oblique decursion to [Page 186] the internal part of the Leg under the Knee. Gracilis arising neer the commissure of the Bones of the Pubis, ends under the former with a round Tendon. Seminervosus descending from the Coxendix beneath, and pas­sing obliquely forwards by the posterior part of the Thigh is inserted in­to the internal part of the Tibia. Semimembranosus ariseth from the same beginning, and fastens his Tendon in the internal part of the Tibia be­hind. Biceps ariseth with a longer portion where the two former do, but is much increased with a fleshy portion in the midst of the Thigh, and ends with a strong Tendon in the top of the Fibula.

The Muscles which particularly move the Feet are to be referred to the Tarsus, or Toes, or great Toe: The Tibialis anticus and Peroneus secun­dus bow the Tarsus. The Tibialis anticus arising from the superior Appen­dix of the Tibia and Fibula, runs transversly under the Ligament of the Foot, and ends in the bone of the Tarsus subject to the great Toe. Pero­neus secundus, is produced from the fleshy rise of the Fibula, and is inserted externally, usually with a double Tendon into the bone of the Tarsus, subservient to the little Toe.

The Muscle called Tibialis posticus moves it obliquely downwards and inwards, and the Peroneus primus outwards. Tibialis posticus arising be­tween the Tibia and Fibula, is inserted into the bone of the Tarsus which is committed to the Cubiforme, neer the internal Ancle. Peroneus primus is deduced from the Appendix of the Fibula about the external Ancle, and is turned back under the Ligament of the Foot, and fastened in the bone of the Tarsus, which is joyned to the great Toe.

Gasterocnemius and Musculus soleus extend the Tarsus: both of them fa­mous Muscles, not only by reason of the bulk of their bodies, but also by reason of the strength of their actions, and they seem to make up that bulk which is called the Calf of the Leg. The Gasterocnemius is ac­counted double, because it ariseth from a double beginning, from the internal and external inferior head of the Thigh, it is inserted into the Heel with a strong Tendon, although it seem to be stretched out under the soal of the Foot even to the confines of the Toes. Soleus takes his denomination from the figure of a Fish so called; it ariseth be­hind from the Fibula, and its Tendon is inserted with the former; here by reason of its thickness and strength, this Tendon above all the rest in the body is called the Great Chord: before, it is inserted into the Heel, it is severed a little from the Tibia, and being grievously either wounded or bruised, it brings pernicious Symptoms. Between these extenders is the Muscle called Plantaris, which arising with a small body from the in­ferior external head of the Thigh, sends a long and slender Tendon to the Heel.

The Muscles which move the Toes, extend, bend, and oblique their Bones; the extender of the third internodium is dilated from the superi­or Appendix of the Tibia, under the transverse Ligament of the Foot, and admitted with four Tendons into the top bone of each Toe. The extendor of the second internodium comes from the Ligament on the back of the foot, and passeth with four Tendons to the four second bones. The Interosseal Muscles extend the first internodium, of which by and by. [Page] [Page 187] that which particularly extends the great Toe, takes its beginning a­bout the middle of the Fibula, under the transverse Ligament of the Foot and so passeth to the three bones of the great Toe; sometimes the Ten­don is doubled, and passeth partly to the first Internodium, and partly to the bone subject to it.

The Muscles called Perforans, Perforatus, and Lumbricales, bow the Toes. Perforans which they also call Sublimis, takes its beginning behind from the Tibia, about the internal Ancle, passing under the Ligament of the Tibia and Heel; in the soal of the Foot being divided into a four-fold Tendon it passeth into the extream internodium of the Toes. Perforatus is by some called Profundus, it proceeds beneath from the Heel, and sen­ding out four Tendons, which are divided toward the end for the pas­sage of the Tendons of the foregoing muscle, they pass to the second internodium of the Toes. Nature frames the Lumbricals of the Tendons, of the two former Muscles, as in the Hands, and in four Tendons they are fastned to the first internodium of the Toes; a portion of musculous flesh moves forward the bowing of these, which being stretched from the Heel, mixeth it self with the beginnings of the Lumbrical muscles. The proper bower of the great Toe proceeds behind from the Fibula, and follows the way of the Muscle Perforans, and is inserted by a strong Tendon into the third bone of the great Toe.

The Interosseal muscles moves the Toes obliquely, placed between the bones of the Metatarsus, of which, such as are external pass to the first internodium of the Toes; the internal pass even to the second Joynt: these muscles also extend the first and second bone of the Toes; the Toes are drawn together by the internal, drawn asunder by the external.

The great and little Toe have singular muscles, the one hath one Ab­ductor, and two Adductors; the other one Abductor. The Abductor of the great Toe takes his rise from the Ligament of the Heel, and passeth to its first internodium. The greater Adductor ariseth from the Ligament of the bone of the Metatarsus, which is next to the little Toe, and by an oblique process passeth to the first Joynt of the great Toe: The lesser Adductor is transverse in Scituation, and ariseth from the Ligament of the little Toe, which binds the first internodium, and passeth with a short and broad Tendon to the first bone of the great Toe. The Abductor of the little Toe is produced outwards from the Heel, and ends in the external side of the first internodium.

Place here the Table of the ninteenth Chapter, which hath the Number 23. at the corner of the brass Plate.

[Page]
AN EXPLANATION OF THE ABLE of the ninteenth Chapter.

This Table shews the Muscles produced by Nature for the various motions of the Thighs, Legs, and Feet.

FIG. I.
  • A The greater part of the muscle called Psoas, which you may see in the 1. figure of Chap. XI. in its Natural scituation, here it is separated from its beginning, and joyned to the internal Iliack muscle, and descends to the thigh.
  • B The internal Iliack muscle.
  • CC The muscle Triceps something uncovered: you may see it whol in the next Figure.
  • D Musculus Lividus.
  • E The membranous muscle conspicuous with a fle­shy body about his beginning, whose broad ten­don is separated from the parts under it.
  • FF The right muscle.
  • GG Musculus vastus externus.
  • HH Musculus vastus internus.
  • II Musculus facialis.
  • K Musculus Tibialis anticus.
  • LL Musculus Peroneus secundus.
  • MM The Extendor of the third internodium of the toes.
  • N The extender of the third internodium of the great toe
  • aa The appendix of the Os Ilium laid open before.
  • b The extremity of the Os Pubis.
  • cccc The tendon of the membranous Muscle.
  • dd A portion of the muscle Gasterocnemius han­ging out, the leg being depressed: the third Fi­gure shews it hanging out of its scituation un­der the character KK.
  • e The membranous Ligament of the Tibia and Fibula.
  • ffff The tendines of the muscles extending the third Internodium.
  • g The transverse Ligament of the foot separated.

FIG. II.
  • A The internrl face of the Os Ilium.
  • B A portion of the great muscle Glutaeus, which the following figure represents separated from the middle Glutaeus.
  • CCC Musculus Triceps.
  • DD A portion of the Gasterocnemius and Soleus as yet joyned.
  • EE Tibialis posticus.
  • FF Peroneus primus.
  • G The extender of the second internodium of the toes in its scituation.
  • aaaa The interosseal muscles.

FIG. III.
  • A Glutaeus major separated and depressed to the side.
  • B Glutaeus medius in his scituation.
  • C Musculus Pyriformis.
  • D The fourth muscle moving the thigh about.
  • E Obturator internus entring the fleshy purse.
  • FF Musculus gracilis.
  • GG Musculus Seminervosus.
  • HH Musculus Semimembranosus elegantly expres­sed.
  • III Musculus Biceps.
  • KK The Gasterocnemius turned backwards, to whose beginnings two small bones called Sa­samoides stick.
  • LL Musculus soleus in his scituation.
  • M The little muscle called Plantaris.
  • N The tendon spread abroad from the heel under the soal of the foot.
  • O The Abductor of the great toe.
  • P The Abductor of the little toe.
  • Q The interosseal muscle pertaining to the little toe.
  • aa The brim of the Os Ilium.
  • b The fleshy purse.

FIG. IV.
  • A The internal face of the Os Ilium.
  • B Musculus Glutaeus minor in his scituation.
  • C Musculus Glutaeus medius out of his scitua­tion.
  • D Musculus Pyriformis.
  • E The fourth muscle moving the thigh about.
  • ε The external Obturator.
  • F The internal Obturator.
  • G The fleshy purse.
  • H Musculus Popliteus.
  • II Musculus perforans.
  • K The muscle bowing the third internodium of the great toe.
  • L Musculus perforatus in his scituation.
  • M The Abductor of the little toe.
  • N The Abductor of the great toe in his scitua­tion.

FIG. V.
  • a The greater Adductor of the great toe.
  • bb The Abductor of the great toe.
  • c The Abductor of the little toe.
  • dddd The internal interosseal Muscles.
  • e The lesser Adductor of the great toe.

FIG. VI.
  • A The muscle Perforatus which bows the second in­ternodium.
  • B The bower of the third internodium of the great toe.
  • C Musculus perforans, or the bower of the third in­ternodium.
  • DD A portion of the musculous flesh joyned to the be­ginnings of the lumbrical muscles.
  • eeee The lumbrical muscles.
  • fff The interosseal muscles with the Abductors of the great and little toe.
[Page]

CHAP. 20. Of the Veins, Arteries, and Nerves of the Extream Parts.

LEst the Extream parts should be wearied with continual labor, they have nourishment and vital vigor administred to them by the Veins and Arteries, and Spirit which is the Author of voluntary motion by the Nerves.

The Veins which are distributed to the Hand take their original from the common Branch, for the subclavian Vein passing out of the Cavity of the Breast, changeth its name into Axillaris, and having first sent out the external and internal Scapular Vein, it is divided into two famous Branches, the one external, the other internal, of which, the one makes the Cephalick or Humeral Vein, the other the Basilick or Liver Vein.

The Cephalick Vein descending from the upper part of the axillar by the Shoulder, neer the external side of the Muscle that bows the Cubit, gives certain small Branches to the skin and muscles, and being dilated to the external knob of the Cubit, it is commonly distributed into three Branches; of which, the first which is the smallest is sent to the Muscles which bow the Fingers, and the long Supinator, and therefore is called the deep Branch of the Cephallica. The second branch which is internal and larger, is obliquely carried under the Joynt of the Cubit, and being united to the internal Branch of the Basilica, makes that Vein which is usually called the median or common Vein; this also descending, after it hath distributed certain branches to the Radius, is divided into two small Branches, of which, that which goes to the Thumb, is called the Cephallical Vein of the Hand, the other hath no name and passeth to the fore and middle Fingers: The third Cephalical Branch and the ex­ternal, passeth obliquely by the Radius to the external or hinder part of the Cubit, where being joyned to a smal Branch of the Basilica, it gives branches to the annular and little Finger, of which, that which passeth to the little Finger is called the Salvatella of the Hand.

The Basilical branch of the axillar Vein, after it hath brought forth the superior and inferior Breast-vein, it enters the Arm, and brings forth the Liver-vein in the right Arm, and the Spleen-vein in the left Arm, or if you will the left Basilica, this giving Branches to the axillar Glandulae, it is divided into two Branches, of which, the deepest associating it self with the Artery and the Nerve of the third and fourth pair passing the Joynt of the Cubit, it is again distributed into two branches, one exter­nal, [Page 189] from which the Thumb, fore, and middle Finger, the other inter­nal from which the Ring and little Finger have Veins. The other Branch of the Basilica is called Subcutaneus, descending to the Cubit pro­duceth its double Vein, the one internal which in the bowing of the Elbow sending out a Vein which joyns it self to the next descending ones, is afterwards joyned to the Cephalical Branch and makes the Me­dian, the other external, which divides its self, and by its greater branch passeth to the Wrest and little Finger, and by its lesser to the internal part of the Hand.

All the Arteries of the Hands proceed from the Axillar branch of the subclavian Artery which is joyned to the internal side of the Shoulder, to the internal branch of the Basilica after it hath sent out the scapular and Breast Arteries, and to the Muscles which occupy the internal, side of the Shoulder, and two branches to the Joynt, under the bowing of the Elbow it is divided into two large Arteries, of which, the external is carried to the Wrest neer the Radius, where its motion is felt by Physiti­ans, and having distributed a small branch to the hinder part of the Hand, being carried under the annular Ligament it is distributed to the Thumb, Fore and middle Finger; the internal branch descending neer the Cubit is deeper and sends branches to the middle, ring, and little Finger.

The Nerves of the Hands take their beginnings from the fift, sixt, and seventh pairs of the Neck, also from the first and second of the Breast; they are first joyned by a various nexure, before they pass to the extream parts: they are vulgarly accounted six pair.

The first pair is carried to the Muscle Deltois, and the skin of the Arm.

The second pair is thicker and being carried by the midst of the Arm before, is inserted into the muscle Biceps with two branches, and after­wards in its progress gives a branch to the external Supinator of the Wrest: the rest being produced by the bowing of the Elbow, is divided into two Branches, the external of which joyns its self a companion to the Cephalick Vein, and passeth to the second internodium of the Thumb, and the internal which is thicker and divided under the Median Vein, and extends its external branch to the Wrest, and its internal being di­lated neer the Basilica, sends out small Nerves on both sides to the Palm of the Hand.

The third pair being joyned neer the second, having first sent a smal branch under the skin, after it toucheth the Arm, sends out branches to the second bower of the Cubit, to the Muscles bowing the third inter­nodium of the Fingers, and branches to the Thumb, fore, and middle Finger.

The fourth pair is larger and thicker than the rest, and at its rise is neer the Basilica Vein, the Artery and the third pair of Nerves, and first bestows a double Branch upon the Muscles that extend the Arm, and the skin; about the joynt of the Elbow it sends two Branches to the Wrest, also Branches to the external and internal side of the Thumb, fore, and middle Finger, three Branches to the muscles, extending the Wrest and [Page 190] Fingers, the remainder is distributed to the Wrest.

The fift pair of Nerves is neer the former, and sends Branches to the Muscles arising from the internal knob of the Shoulder; it produceth two Branches, of which, one passing to the Palm of the Hand, is subser­vient to the little, ring, and middle Finger: the other runs to the ex­tremities of those Fingers.

The sixt pair, which is the last of the Nerves of the Neck, is almost altogether subcutaneous; it hath diverse branches, most of which, some pass under, some above the Basilica, which being pricked in letting blood, cause acute pain, and convulsions; the remainder of it ends in the Wrest. Note this, That neither the Veins, Arteries, nor Nerves, have the same bigness in all Bodies, nor yet the same number nor pas­sage: observe the like in the Foot.

We come now to the Veins of the Foot, which take their original from the the Iliack Branch of the Vena Cava.

The first is the Saphena, produced by a long product, by the internal side of the Thigh and Leg, sending branches from the beginning and a­bout the middle to the Thigh and Knee; it is at last divided into many Branches about the Thigh and Ancle, to the Toes, especially the great Toe.

The second crural Vein is called Ischias, proceeding externally from the same Root; this is shorter and runs transversly to the skin before, and the muscles of the Coxendix, which are next to it.

The third is called Muscula, produced from the crural Branch descen­ding to the Muscles, to which it gives a double branch, internally and externally, nay, sometimes 'tis double in its beginning; the one exter­nal which is least, and passeth to the Muscles Rectus, and Vastus externus, which extend the Leg; the other bigger and internal, which gives very many branches to the Muscles of the Thigh.

The fourth crural Vein is called Poplitea, arising from the same begin­ning, but most commonly hath two Branches uniting themselves in their progress; it descends by the middle of the Ham, and distributing Branches above and below the Calf of the Leg, is carried to the Heel, and ends in the skin of the external Ancle.

But the Crural Branch having produced these Branches, descends be­tween the two heads of the Thigh, and produceth a double Branch, in­ternal and external: The internal gives Branches to the Muscles, which constitute the Calf of the Leg, and giving Branches to the skin it turns back under the internal Ancle, and passeth even to the great Toe. The external is less than the former, and hath two Branches, of which, the first passeth to the Muscles of the Calf of the Leg, and [...]ose that bow the Toes: about the middle of the Tibia it sends a small branch to the great Toe, the fore, and middle Toe, and passing the transverse Liga­ment outwardly, it gives Branches to the Muscles of the Foot which bow the Toes; the other Branch after it hath dispersed Branches to the external and hinder region of the Leg, it ends in the external Ancle and Foot. The Trunk of the Crural Vein joyns its self as a companion to the Crural Artery, and sends out branches to the right and left side.

Nature hath often framed shutters in the Veins both of the Arms and Legs, which restrain the inordinate flux of blood to the extream parts.

All the Arteries of the Foot, arise from the Branch of the Crural Arte­ry; for the external Iliack branch passing out of the Abdomen to the Pri­vities, sends a branch to the internal Iliack Muscle, and passing without the Abdomen is called Cruralis; internally it produceth the Artery Ischias, and the external Muscula, which is carried to the external Muscles of the Thigh, and the internal Muscula which passeth to the posterior and inter­nal Muscles thereof.

The Branch of the Crural Artery is divided into very many Branches above the Ham, of which, three or four small ones pass to the Fat, and the Membrane under it. Of these, that called Poplitea is most obser­vable, which ariseth about the middle of the Thigh, and is distributed partly to its inferior Muscles, and partly to those of the Calf of the Leg.

The Crural Branch descending about the Ham, gives another Artery, called Suralis, which sometimes is double, and passeth partly to the Joynt, and partly to the Muscle of the Calf of the Leg called Gasteroc­nemius. In the Ham it self the Artery is divided into the external Branch, which passeth to the foremost Muscles of the Leg, and into two hinder Branches, of which, one passeth to the Muscles of the Calf, the other passing the transverse Ligament of the Foot, is inserted into the Muscles adducing the Toes.

The common branch descending by the hinder part of the Leg, having first sent out a small Branch which is distributed to the great Toe and the back of the Foot, is at length covered with the Tendons of the Toes, and being divided into a double Branch, passeth to all the Toes▪

The Nerves of the Foot proceed from the three inferior of the Loyns, and the four Superior pair of the Os Sacrum, and having first made a plex­ure, they are afterwards divided into four Branches, of which, the first and third are shorter, & not carried beyond the longitude of the Thigh: the second comes to the Tibia, and the fourth even to the Nails of the Feet.

The first Branch of the Nerves ariseth from the upper part of the plex­ure, descends to the internal Rotator of the Thigh, and sends Branches to the Fascialis, Rectus, and Vastus externus.

The second descends by the Groyn with the Vein and Artery, and down to the Feet with the Vein Saphena, although in this long passage, it give Branches as to other places, to especially to the Knee, the re­mainder of it ends in the Muscles of the Thigh and Knee.

The third branch which is sent from the plexure, passing through the hole of the Os Pubis, gives branches to the external Obturators, and the Muscles which erect the Yard; the remainder of it is distributed to the skin of the Thigh, and the first and third Muscles which bow the Leg.

The fourth is made up of the four pairs which proceed from the Os Sacrum, and second to none in length, thickness, and driness: this ver­ging to the lower part of the Thigh sends a branch backwards to the [Page 192] Buttocks and skin of the Thigh? and three others to the head of the Musculus Seminervosus, Semimembranosus and Biceps which bow the Leg, and to the Muscle Triceps, the trunk it self, some small Branches being sent to the Thigh, to the first Extendor of the Tarsus and to the Muscle Plantaris, is divided into two branches in the Cavity of the Knee, of which, the one is external, the other internal; the external passeth to the Fibula, the external Ancle, and the skin by diverse Branches, and pas­sing the Ligament of the Tibia and Fibula, passing under the transverse Ligament, it passeth to the extenders of the Toes, and the Toes them­selves: the internal Branch passeth by the back-side of the Leg, descen­ding between the Muscles or the Calf, is distributed under the Ligament by the longitude of the Foot, and sends a double Nerve to each Toe.

Nature is often various in the distinction of these Nerves, and yet al­waies observes its scope: Sometimes this Nerve of the fourth pair is di­vided higher above the middle of the Thigh, into the internal and ex­ternal Branch; sometimes it keeps whol even to the middle of the Leg, and sends out internal and external Branches to the Thigh and Leg.

The closures of the extream parts are the Nails, which are of a middle substance between Bones and Cartilages; to the Roots of which are car­ried both Arteries, Veins, and Nerves, from which they have life, nou­rishment, and vigor of sence; they equal the bigness of the Fingers with a decent form, and are a little bowed; they are firmly joyned to the skin, and in the Hands they serve for apprehension, and handling of small things; in the Feet, for security and strength.

And thus thou hast the scope of Nature in the forming of Man, where­by, the Name and Power of the most Wise CREATOR is held out, that so thou maiest cry out with Panacres, ‘HE IS ALL THINGS.’

Place here the Table of the twentieth Chapter, which hath the Number 24. at the corner of the brass Plate.

[Page]
AN EXPLANATION OF THE TABLE of the twenteth Chapter.

This last Table shews the Veins, Arteries, and Nerves of the extream Parts, being not care­full of the smallest branches, the huge multitude of which would obscure the greater, and dull the Brain of the Learner: The most famous are delineated, such as are shewed publickly in the Theater in Dissection of Men of perfect age.

FIG. I. Shews the Veins distributed to the Hand.
  • A The axillar branch of the Vena Cava.
  • BBB Vena Cephalica.
  • CCC Vena Basilica.
  • a The external Scapular.
  • b The branch of the Cephalica, which is carried to the Deltois.
  • c d Branches of the Cephalica di­stributed to the bowers of the arm.
  • e The deep branch of the Cephalica.
  • ff The internal branch of the Cepha­lica making the Median.
  • g The Median vein descending.
  • h The Cephalica of the Hand.
  • ii The external branch of the Ce­phalica.
  • ae The Salvatella of the Hand.
  • k The internal Scapular.
  • l The superior breast-vein.
  • m The inferior breast-vein.
  • nnn The Basilick branches carried to the Extendors of the Cubit.
  • oo The deep branch of the Basilica.
  • p A singular branch of the deep branch, which is carried out to the cubit, with the fourth pair of Nerves.
  • q The external branch of the deep basilical
  • r The internal branch of the same.
  • s The Subcutaneus branch of the ba­silica.
  • tt The internal branch of the Subcu­taneus branch, which with the ce­phalical, procureth the median.
  • u Its branch joyning it self to the common vein.
  • x The external vein of the Subcu­taneus branch of the Basilica.
  • yy The greater branch of the external Subcutaneus.
  • z The lesser branch of the same.

FIG. II. The Arteries distributed to the Arm.
  • A The axillar branch of the artery.
  • a The internal scapular.
  • b The external scapular.
  • c The superior Breast-artery.
  • d The inferior breast-artery.
  • e f g Branches of the artery distri­buted to the muscles of the shoulder.
  • hhh Branches of the artery distribu­ted to the joynt of the Elbow.
  • B The external branch of the artery in the cubit.
  • C The internal branch.
  • ii The branch which is carried to the muscles of the Radius.
  • k The branch carried to the muscles of the Ulna.
  • l m n o Branches carried from the in­ternal branch to the wrest, little, ring and middle finger.
  • pp Branches carried to the hands from the external branch.
  • qq r s Branches pertaining to the thumb, fore, and middle finger.

FIG. III. Designs the Nerves distributed to the hand.
  • 4 5 6 7. The four Vertebrae of the Neck.
  • 1. The first Verbra of the breast.
  • a b c d The five Nerves proceeding out of the holes of the Vertebrae.
  • ff The first pair of Nerves descending from the plexure **.
  • gg The second pair.
  • hh The third pair.
  • ii The fourth pair bigger than the rest.
  • kk The fift pair.
  • ll The sixt pair which is subcutaneus.

FIG. IV. Contains the veins of the foot.
  • A The crural branch of the Vena Cava.
  • aaaa The Vein Saphéna.
  • bbb The branches of the Saphena distributed by the interior part of the thigh.
  • cc The Vein Ischias.
  • dd The internal Musculae.
  • ee The external Muscula.
  • fff The vein Poplitea consisting of a double beginning.
  • gg The internal branch of the crural vein.
  • hh The external branch of the same.
  • i The first branch of the external crural.
  • kk The second branch of the same.
  • ll The remainder of the same.
  • m The vein of the foot called Ischias.

FIG. V. Contains the Arteries of the Foot.
  • AAA The crural Artery produced from the external Iliack branch of the great Artery.
  • a The artery Pudenda.
  • b The artery carried to the internal Iliack muscle.
  • c The artery Ischias.
  • dd The external Muscula.
  • e The internal Muscula.
  • ffff The arteries distributed to the membrane and fat.
  • gg The artery Poplitea.
  • hh The arteries called Surals.
  • ii The foremost branch of the crural artery.
  • kk The first hindmost branch of the same.
  • ll The second hindermost branch of the same.

FIG. VI. Represents the Nerves of the Foot.
  • 2.3.4.5. The four Vertebrae of the Lyons.
  • 66 The Os Sacrum.
  • A A pair of Nerves pertaining to the tranverse muscles of the Abdo­men.
  • BB The first pair of Nerves of the foot.
  • CC The second pair.
  • aaa A branch of the same which ac­companies the Saphena.
  • bb The remainder of the same branch.
  • DD The third pair of of the Nerves of the foot.
  • EEE The fourth pair, which is the greatest.
  • c Its Branch which turns back to the Buttocks and skin of the thigh.
  • ddd Branches sent to the bowers of the leg.
  • eeee Branches sent to the bowers of the Thigh.
  • f A branch sent to the muscle Plan­taris and the extenders of the Tar­sus.
  • g.h Two external branches sent to the toes and the muscles of the Fi­bula.
  • i The internal branch carried to the great and second toe.
  • k.l The internal branches sent to the sural muscles.
  • m The remainder of the Nerve of the sixt pair, dispersed by a double branch under the foot to the toes.

FIG. VII. Shews the Basilica vein open, in which three shutters appear.
  •  

FIG. VIII. Shews a branch of the crural vein o­pen, and three double, and one single shutter.
  •  

FIG. IX. and X. Shew a portion of the Nerve of the fourth pair divided into smal Nerves like threeds, in gathering together of which, the wonderful po­wer of Nature appears.
  •  
[Page]

This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Text Creation Partnership. Searching, reading, printing, or downloading EEBO-TCP texts is reserved for the authorized users of these project partner institutions. Permission must be granted for subsequent distribution, in print or electronically, of this EEBO-TCP Phase II text, in whole or in part.